COOPER
COOPER S
JOHN COOPER
WORKS
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It
contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
Set off now. We wish you a lot of pleasure and enjoyment driving
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 212.
6 Information
AT A GLANCE
12 Cockpit
CONTROLS
20 Opening and closing
36 Adjusting
45 Transporting children safely
50 Driving
61 Displays
69 Lamps
74 Safety
84 Driving stability control systems
88 Driving comfort
91 Climate
96 Interior equipment
106 Storage compartments
DRIVING TIPS
112 Things to remember when driving
116 Loading
120 Saving fuel
ENTERTAINMENT
124 Radio MINI Boost CD
COMMUNICATION
138 Telephone
MOBILITY
150 Refueling
152 Fuel
154 Wheels and tires
166 Engine compartment
168 Engine oil
170 Coolant
172 Maintenance
174 Replacing components
184 Breakdown assistance
190 Care
194 Indicator/warning lamps
REFERENCE
208 Technical data
212 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Information
Using this Owner's
Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
any questions you may have.
Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.mini.com
Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies radio display texts used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice operation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐
sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW
AG.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that
performs work, e.g. maintenance and repair,
according to MINI specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or
repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
uine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product from
another manufacturer can be used with MINI
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
even if a country-specific official approval was
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its
individual components, e.g., wheel rotation
speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and malfunctions in important
system components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After
an error is corrected, the information in the
fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a
continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
All around the steering wheel
1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in and
out 42
Power windows, front 33
MINI Countryman: power win‐
dows, rear 34
MINI Countryman: safety switch
for rear power windows 35
2 Parking lights 69
Low beams 69
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 69
Adaptive Light Control 71
Turn signal 53
Seite 12
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
High-beams 53
Headlight flasher 53
Roadside parking lights 70
Computer 62
3 Tachometer 62
Instrument lighting 72
Resetting the trip odometer 61
4 Washer/wiper system 54
5 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 50
6 Ignition lock 50
7 Steering wheel buttons, right
Resuming cruise control 89
Storing the speed and accelerat‐
ing or slowing down 89
Activating/deactivating cruise
control 88
Steering wheel buttons, left
Volume
Telephone 138
Change the radio station
Select a music track
Scroll through the redial list
8 Horn, total area
9 Adjust the steering wheel 44
10 Releasing the hood 167
Seite 13
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Displays
1 Tachometer 62
with indicator and warning lights 15
2 Display for
▷ Current speed 61
▷ Indicator/warning lights 15
3 Resetting the trip odometer 61
4 Display for
▷ Steptronic transmission position 58
▷ On-board computer 62
▷ Service requirements 66
▷ Odometer and trip odometer 61
▷ Flat Tire Monitor 77
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor 79
▷ Settings and information 63
▷ Personal Profile settings 21
5 Instrument lighting 72
6 Speedometer with indicator and warning
lights 15
7 Fuel gauge 62
8 Radio display
9 Radio Radio MINI Boost CD 124
Seite 14
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Indicator/warning lights
The principle
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors in display
area 1 or 2.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the
ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.
What to do in case of a malfunction
A list of all indicator and warning lights, as well
as notes on possible causes of malfunctions
and on how to respond, refer to page 194
All around the center console
1 Hazard warning system
2 Speedometer with
Radio MINI Boost CD 124
3 CD drive
4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐
trol 91
5 Buttons on the center console
Seite 15
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Seat heating 38
Central locking, inside 25
Front fog lamps 72
Sport button 86
Driving stability control systems
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 84
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 85
6 Storage compartment
All around the roofliner
1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐
senger airbags 76
2 Reading lights 73
Ambient lighting color 73
Glass sunroof, electrical 32
Interior lights 72
All around the shift/
selector lever
1 AUX-IN port 132
USB audio interface 133
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Seite 17
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Opening tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Locking
General information
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain
the batteries' charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 30.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐
mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐
sonal Profile, refer to page 21.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 172.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 25.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 20
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐
tings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐
mote control is recognized and the settings
stored with it are called up and imple‐
mented.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
▷ The individual settings are stored for no
more than three remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 22.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 26.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 53.
▷ Settings for the displays in the speedometer
and tachometer:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 64.
▷ Date format, refer to page 64.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 64.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 71.
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 70.
▷ Automatic climate control, refer to
page 93: AUTO program, activating/deac‐
tivating the cooling function, setting the
temperature, air volume, and air distribu‐
tion.
▷ Entertainment:
▷ Last entertainment source.
▷ Radio MINI Boost CD:
Tone settings, refer to page 126.
Volume, refer to page 126.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles on the driver's and front passenger
sides.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
anti-theft protection is switched on and off
as well. The anti-theft protection makes it
impossible to unlock the doors using the
lock buttons or door handles.
Seite 21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and
ambient lighting are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐
fer to page 30.
Operating from the inside
Via the switch/button for the central locking
system, refer to page 25.
In an accident of the necessary severity, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing:
from the outside
Using the remote control
General information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button. The vehicle is un‐
locked.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps are
switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐
cator lever until the display changes.
4. Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until the symbol and "SET" are
displayed.
5. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐
cator lever until the display changes.
6. Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until the symbol shown is dis‐
played, arrow.
Seite 22
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
7. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐
cator lever until the display changes.
8. Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly to select the following settings:
▷
Selected setting:
Pressing the button on the re‐
mote control once unlocks only the
driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehi‐
cle.
▷
Selected setting:
Pressing the button on the re‐
mote control once unlocks the entire
vehicle.
9. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐
cator lever until the display changes. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The power windows are opened. Depending on
the vehicle equipment, the glass sunroof is
raised.
Convenient closing with the remote control is
not possible.
Locking
Press the button.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
Setting the confirmation signals
Have unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐
firmed.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select, arrow:
▷ Confirmation signal during unlock‐
ing
Seite 23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Confirmation signal during locking
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to select:
▷
The hazard warning system flashes dur‐
ing unlocking/locking.
▷
An acoustic signal sounds during un‐
locking/locking.
▷
The hazard warning system lights up
and an acoustic signal sounds during
unlocking/locking.
▷
The function is deactivated.
9. Press and hold the button until the display
changes. The setting is stored.
Switching on the interior lamps
When the vehicle is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your ve‐
hicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second
and then release it.
Malfunctions
The function of the remote control may be im‐
paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐
lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with
the integrated key.
If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐
cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐
mote control is discharged. Use this remote
control on an extended trip to recharge the
battery, refer to page 20.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 24
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Using the door lock
Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer to
page 22.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked and locked via
the door lock.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
Unlocking the doors and tailgate at
once
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
gate at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior, refer to page 25.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door, refer to page 26.
3. To lock the vehicle:
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
Convenient opening and closing
In vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐
cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can be
operated via the door lock.
Opening/closing
Turn the key to the unlock or lock position and
hold it there.
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver's
door can be unlocked or locked by turning the
integrated key to the end positions of the door
lock.
Opening and closing:
from the inside
Operation via
▷ Switch in the center console:
▷ Button in the driver's or front passenger
door:
Seite 25
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace‐
man as an example.
The switch or the buttons can be used to lock
or unlock the doors and tailgate when the
doors are closed, but they are not theft-pro‐
tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening doors
▷ Using the switch or the buttons for the cen‐
tral locking system, unlock all of the doors
at once and then pull the door opener
above the armrest, or
▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice:
the door is unlocked the first time and
opened the second time.
Locking
▷ Press the switch/button or
▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To
avoid locking yourself out by accident, the
driver's door cannot be locked at the lock
button while the door is open.
Automatic locking
In addition, it is possible to set the situations in
which the vehicle locks. The setting is stored for
the remote control in use.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol shown is displayed, arrow.
Seite 26
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to select:
▷
The central locking system locks auto‐
matically after some time if no door is
opened.
▷
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
▷
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened or after you drive away.
▷
The central locking system remains un‐
locked.
9. Press and hold the button until the display
changes. The setting is stored.
Tailgate
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.◀
Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other‐
wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from view
and driving safety will be compromised.
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be unlocked using the remote control
if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Opening from the inside
Press the button on the driver's footwell.
MINI Countryman
Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,
or
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is
unlocked.
MINI Paceman
Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,
or
Seite 27
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is
unlocked.
Closing
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Make sure that the cargo cover rests on the
rubber buffers of the securing straps when clos‐
ing the tailgate.
MINI Countryman
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
MINI Paceman
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control. All you need to do is to
have the remote control with you, e.g., in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐
tects the remote control when it is nearby or in
the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence in the vicinity.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to
operate the windows.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 20.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys‐
tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐
side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing
procedure, if necessary.
Seite 28
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Unlocking
Press button 1.
Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐
er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, refer
to page 22.
Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐
cle again.
Convenient opening with the remote control,
refer to page 23.
Locking
Press button 1.
For Convenient closing, press and hold but‐
ton 1.
The windows and, if applicable, the glass sun‐
roof are closed in addition.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the top half of the MINI emblem.
This corresponds to pressing the following but‐
ton on the remote control: .
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle after the
tailgate is closed, the tailgate opens again
slightly. The hazard warning system flashes and
an acoustic signal sounds.
Power windows and electrical glass
sunroof
When the engine is switched off, the windows
and the sunroof can be operated as long as
neither the doors nor the tailgate are opened.
When the door and tailgate are closed again
and the remote control is detected inside the
vehicle, the windows and the sunroof can be
operated again.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
to be able to operate the windows and the sun‐
roof while the engine is switched off and the
doors are open.
Switching on the radio ready state
Press the Start/Stop button to switch on the
radio ready state, refer to page 50.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐
wise, the engine will start.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can
be switched on, refer to page 50, when a re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐
essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐
tion lock.
Switching off the engine in cars with
Steptronic transmission
The engine can only be switched off with the
selector lever in position P, refer to page 57.
To switch off the engine with the selector lever
in position N, the remote control must be in‐
serted in the ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with Steptronic
transmission into a car wash
1.
Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch the engine off.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
by local radio waves, such as by a mobile
phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote
Seite 29
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
control or when a mobile phone is being
charged in the vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using
the buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
control into the ignition switch.
Warning lights
The warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot be
started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐
nition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is run‐
ning: the remote control is no longer in‐
side the vehicle.
After switching off the engine, the engine can
only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐
onds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp lights up: replace
the remote control battery.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains
a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert a new battery with the positive side
facing upwards.
3. Press the cover closed.
Take the old battery to a collection point,
a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Alarm system
The concept
The enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐
ing:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements inside the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
Depending on the market-specific version, the
alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry
attempts by:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
Seite 30
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Arming and disarming the alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked and unlocked, the
alarm system is armed and disarmed at the
same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some market-specific versions.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate with armed alarm system
The tailgate, refer to page 24, can also be
opened when the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
When you subsequently close the tailgate, it is
again locked and monitored.
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some market-specific versions.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 22.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock.
▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying
the remote control with you, push the but‐
ton on the door lock.
Display on the tachometer
When the alarm system is being armed, all LEDs
pulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes after
approx. 16 minutes.
▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the
doors, hood, or tailgate is not properly
closed.
Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐
maining items are locked and the LEDs
pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx.
16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes.
The interior motion sensor is not activated.
▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐
locked: the vehicle has not been tampered
with in the meantime.
▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlocked
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: the vehicle has been tampered
with in the meantime.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least two seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button on the
remote control.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Seite 31
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Interior motion sensor
For the interior motion sensor to function prop‐
erly, the windows and the glass sunroof must
be closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
▷
Press the button on the remote
control twice in succession.
▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated
key.
The LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interior
motion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐
hicle is unlocked and locked again.
Glass sunroof, electrical
General information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Convenient operation via:
▷ Door lock, refer to page 25
▷ Comfort Access, refer to page 29
Tilting the glass sunroof
MINI Countryman:
▷ Press the switch back to the resistance
point and hold.
Both glass sunroofs are raised.
Releasing stops the motion.
▷ With the ignition switched on, press the
switch back past the resistance point.
Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully.
Pressing again stops the motion.
MINI Paceman:
▷ Press the switch back to the resistance
point and hold.
The front glass sunroof is raised.
Releasing stops the motion.
▷ With the ignition switched on, press the
switch back past the resistance point.
The front glass sunroof is fully raised.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Seite 32
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Opening, closing
MINI Countryman:
▷ In the raised position with the ignition
switched on, press the switch back and
hold.
The front glass sunroof is opened. The rear
glass sunroof is closed.
Releasing stops the motion.
The same method is used to close the glass
sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐
ward.
The front glass sunroof remains in the raised
position. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press‐
ing again closes both sunroofs completely.
MINI Paceman:
▷ In the raised position with the ignition
switched on, press the switch back and
hold.
The front glass sunroof is opened.
Releasing stops the motion.
The same method is used to close the glass
sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐
ward.
The front glass sunroof remains in the raised
position. Pressing again closes the roof com‐
pletely.
Roller sunblind
The roller sunblind can be opened and closed
separately from the glass sunroof.
After a power failure
After a power failure, it could happen that the
sunroof can only be raised. In this case, have
the system initialized. The manufacturer of your
MINI recommends that this work be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Power windows
General information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
If, after having been opened and closed a num‐
ber of times in close succession, a window can
only be closed, the system is overheated. Let
the system cool down for several minutes with
the ignition switched on or the engine running.
Opening, closing
Front windows
To open:
Seite 33
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The
window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
point. The window opens automatically in
the radio ready state and higher.
Press again briefly to stop the opening pro‐
cedure.
To close:
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The
window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
MINI Countryman: rear windows
To open:
▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The
window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
point. The window opens automatically in
the radio ready state and higher.
To close:
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The
window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
After the ignition is switched off
The windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute after the remote control is removed or the
ignition is switched off.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window reopens slightly.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the area
of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
If there is an external danger or, for example, if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, the window can be closed
manually.
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Seite 34
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Countryman: safety switch
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, such as by
children.
Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety
function is switched on.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 35
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Adjusting
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 38
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 41.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 74.
Seats
Note before adjusting
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
Front seat adjustment
Forward/backward
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into
the desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Adjusting
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Height
Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐
rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐
rows .
Backrest
MINI Countryman:
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight
to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
MINI Paceman:
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight
to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐
rows 2.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐
gion.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an
example.
Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐
vature.
MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustment
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired
position.
Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest
Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 102.
Seite 37
Adjusting
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Paceman: entry in the rear
1. Pull the lever on the back of the seat up‐
ward, arrow 1.
The backrest folds forward.
2. Push against the backrest to move the seat
forward, arrow 2.
To make it easier to enter the car in the rear,
push back the safety belt on the lower belt
guide rail if necessary.
Restoring the original seat position
The driver's seat has a mechanical memory
function for the forward/backward seat setting
and the backrest setting.
1.
Push the seat back to the original position.
Do not fold back the backrest until the seat
is in its original position; otherwise, the seat
will engage in its current position. If this
happens, adjust the forward/backward po‐
sition manually, refer to page 36.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of injuries. Fold back and lock the backrests
before driving.◀
Seat heating
Switching on
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature set last.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down
to no heat in order to reduce the load on the
battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Switch off
Press the button longer.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five
safety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐
sengers.
However, they can only offer protection when
adjusted correctly.
Information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Adjusting
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted.
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt. In‐
fants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and respec‐
tively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to your
body as possible over your lap and should‐
ers.
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
ach.
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the belt
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 36.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Securing the buckle tongues
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, slide
the buckle tongue up to the belt stop knob with
the clip.
When the outer rear seats are not occupied, the
buckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid up
to the cargo area trim with the clip.
This helps avoid annoying noises when driving.
Seite 39
Adjusting
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Countryman: center safety belt of
rear seat
The belt buckle embossed with the word CEN‐
TER is intended exclusively for use by passen‐
gers riding in the center position.
If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the
backrests must be locked, refer to page 103.
The safety belt will not have a restraining effect
if the backrest is not locked.
Belt holder in the headliner
The holder for the safety belt is located in the
headliner.
1 Opening for the safety belt
2 Holder for the small buckle tongue
Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder.
Move both buckle tongues downward.
Closing
Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safety
belt into the small belt buckle 3.
Opening
Press the red button on the small belt buckle 3
with buckle tongue 1.
When the center safety belt is locked:
Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongue
of the outer left safety belt.
Putting on the belt
1 Large buckle tongue
2 Small buckle tongue
3 Small belt buckle
4 Large belt buckle
Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in belt
buckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckle
tongue engage in the belt buckle.
Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle in
such a way that the belt lies smoothly against
the body of the buckled person and is not
twisted.
Stowing the center safety belt
If the center seat is not occupied, insert the belt
buckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar‐
rows.
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Adjusting
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder on
the headliner, refer to page 40, and insert them
into the provided holders.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Check whether the safety
belt has been fastened correctly.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. After
an accident, have the safety belts checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints
on occupied seats prior to driving and make
sure that the center of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head at eye level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly set head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approx. at ear level.
MINI Countryman: the center rear head re‐
straint is not height adjustable.
Seite 41
Adjusting
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Height adjustment
To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down until it engages.
MINI Countryman: additionally press button 2
on the rear head restraints only if you wish to
remove them.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Front
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. MINI Countryman: tilt the backrest back
slightly.
MINI Paceman: fold the backrest forward if
necessary.
3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐
straint all the way to the stop.
MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐
ton 2 using a suitable tool.
4. Pull out the head restraint.
5. Fold back the backrest.
Rear
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐
straint all the way to the stop.
MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐
ton 2 using a suitable tool.
4. Pull out the head restraint completely.
5. Fold back the rear seat backrest.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's mirror.
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.◀
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Adjusting
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Overview
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting the left/right mirror
3 Folding the mirror in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change to the other mirror: slide the
mirror switch over.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding the mirror in and out
Press button 3.
The mirror can be folded in up to a vehicle
speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically
while the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on when the external temperature is
below a certain value.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the blinding effect from the rear
when driving at night: turn the knob.
Interior rearview and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Seite 43
Adjusting
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield in
front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Seite 44
CONTROLS
Adjusting
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
The right place for chil‐
dren
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause addi‐
tional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 12 years
of age (13 years of age) or shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems
suitable for the age, weight and size of the
child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front and side airbags on
the front passenger side are deactivated, refer
to page 75.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Seite 45
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
Installing child re‐
straint fixing systems
Before mounting
MINI Countryman: before mounting a child re‐
straint fixing system on the rear seats, move
the seats into the rearmost positions.
Adjust the inclination of the center backrest to
that of the respective outer backrest.
After mounting the child restraint fixing system
on the respective outer rear seat, adjust the
backrest forward, if necessary, to ensure that
the backrest is in contact with the child re‐
straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, refer
to page 102.
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system on
the front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
side, and knee airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change this seat position once it has
been set.
Child seat security
The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an
example.
The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐
tension in order to permit attachment of child
restraint fixing systems.
To lock the safety belt
1.
Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system.
The safety belt is locked.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 in
addition, refer to page 40.
Guide the safety belt to the holder on the
headliner.
LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
Information
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can
be limited. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.◀
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
MINI Countryman
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
MINI Paceman
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐
tem.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Seite 47
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Child restraint fixing
systems with an upper re‐
taining strap
Mounting points
CAUTION
The mounting points for the upper retain‐
ing straps of child restraint systems are only
provided for these retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐
aged. There is risk of property damage. Only
mount child restraint systems to the upper re‐
taining straps.◀
MINI Countryman
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐
taining strap, arrows.
MINI Paceman
There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐
taining strap, arrows.
Guide of the upper LATCH retaining
strap
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
Outer seats:
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
MINI Countryman, center seat
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
Seite 48
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Cargo area floor
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐
ing system
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for‐
ward.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or there is none. In particular situations,
e.g. braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked.◀
MINI Countryman: lock‐
ing doors and windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power window
This locks the rear window switches so that the
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
Press the safety switch, refer to page 35.
Seite 49
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
electrical consumers can operate.
Steering wheel lock
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Steptronic transmission
You can only take out the remote control if
transmission position P is engaged: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts when the Start/Stop button is
pressed and:
▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐
pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is
depressed.
Radio ready state
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 28, by
pressing the button on the door handle or
the
button on the remote control.
▷ After a certain period of time.
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐
cator and warning lights light up for different
lengths of time.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
Driving
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off
All indicator and warning lights in the displays
go out.
The ignition switches off automatically when
the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/
Stop button again switches the ignition back
on.
For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:
▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal.
▷ The low beams are switched on.
Starting the engine
General information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, additionally
secure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel
chock.◀
CAUTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
ing in quick succession.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary; start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Do not depress the accelerator when starting
the engine.
Starting the engine
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or with
Comfort Access inside the vehicle, refer to
page 28.
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Seite 51
Driving
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Steptronic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 28.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, additionally
secure the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 190.
Switching off the engine
Manual transmission
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock.
Steptronic transmission
1.
Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐
tion lock.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Also follow the instructions under Switching off
the engine, refer to page 52.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Driving
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Releasing
Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
lever.
Information
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
The brake lights do not light up when the park‐
ing brake is pulled.
Turn signal, high-beams,
headlight flasher
1 Turn signal
2 Switching on the high-beams
3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight
flasher
Turn signal
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Seite 53
Driving
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol shown is displayed, arrow.
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to select:
▷
Turn signal flashes once.
▷
Triple turn signal.
9. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Washer/wiper system
Information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk of
property damage. Defrost the windshield prior
to switching the wipers on.◀
Overview
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Driving
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the
time between wipes is controlled automatically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
CAUTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3.
The symbol is shown in the tachometer.
Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor
1.
Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐
tivity.
7. Wait or hold the button until the display
changes.
The settings were stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Cleaning the windshield and headlights
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlights are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Seite 55
Driving
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the wash water con‐
tainer is empty.◀
CAUTION
Use of the washer system with the hood
open may damage the headlamp washer sys‐
tem. There is a risk of property damage. Only
use the washer system if the hood is fully
locked.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
0 Resting position
1 Switching on intermittent wipe
Turn the cap to level 1.
When reverse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittent
wipe
Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold.
3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po‐
sition
Turn the cap to level 3 and hold.
The rear window wiper does not move if the
cap is in position 1 before the ignition is
switched on.
To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Move the cap to its basic position.
2. Select the required position again.
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the wash water con‐
tainer is empty.◀
Washer fluid
General information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.◀
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Driving
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
WARNING
Washer fluid may catch fire if it comes
into contact with hot engine parts. There is risk
of injuries or risk of property damage. Only refill
washer fluid after the engine has cooled down.
Then fully close the cap of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐
trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐
cording to the manufacturer instructions.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐
centrate and do not fill in pure water; this could
damage the washer system.
Do not mix window washing concentrate from
different manufacturers; this could cause the
washer nozzles to clog.
Manual transmission
CAUTION
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is risk of
property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th
gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When
the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight
resistance needs to be overcome.
Steptronic transmission
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears
can also be shifted manually, refer to
page 58, using Steptronic.
Parking the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to roll.
Disengaging the remote control
To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove
the remote control from the ignition lock, refer
to page 50.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Seite 57
Driving
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Displays in the tachometer
The selector lever position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
▷ To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐
wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
To override the lock, press the button on the
front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
front wheels are blocked.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
For example, engage this position in a car
wash. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left into the M/S shifting slot.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐
played. This position is recommended for a per‐
formance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left into the M/S shifting slot.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Driving
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The tachometer displays the engaged gear,
e. g. M1.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at suitable
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐
matic mode, the transmission switches to
manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to au‐
tomatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,
manual mode remains active.
▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles:
The transmission shifts up.
▷ Press one of the two shift paddles:
The transmission shifts down.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at suitable
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Manually unlocking the selector lever
lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is
depressed, and the button on the selector lever
is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐
ridden:
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐
essary.
4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop on
the passenger side.
The pulling hook is found in the vehicle
document portfolio or in the pouch of the
wheel change set, refer to page 181.
5. Pull the loop upward.
6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition, pressing the button on the front of
the selector lever.
Seite 59
Driving
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
WARNING
If the transmission lock is released man‐
ually, the vehicle may begin to roll. There is risk
of an accident. Before manually unlocking the
transmission lock, set the parking brake to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling away.◀
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Driving
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Displays
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Odometer, external tem‐
perature display, clock
Overview
1 Current speed
2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐
ature, time
3 Resetting the trip odometer
Press the button on the turn indicator lever to
open information in display area 2.
The following information is displayed consecu‐
tively:
▷ Trip odometer
▷ Time
▷ External temperature
Trip odometer
Displaying the trip odometer
Press button 3 briefly.
Resetting the trip odometer
1. Press button 3 briefly.
The trip odometer is displayed.
2. Press button 3 again.
The trip odometer is reset.
Time
Set the time, refer to page 65.
External temperature, external
temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning light lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures◀
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐
nal temperature, refer to page 64.
Seite 61
Displays
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Tachometer
It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning light will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 170.
Fuel gauge
The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the
fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle with
the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 150.
Filling capacities, refer to page 211.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange to
red, arrow.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐
ometer.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
A warning light lights up below a range of ap‐
prox. 30 miles/50 km.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Computer
Opening information in the tachometer
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Overview of the information
The following information is displayed consecu‐
tively by repeatedly pressing the button on the
turn indicator lever:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐
fer to page 64.
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Displays
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which
the engine is running.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an
efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and
the engine was switched off manually are not
included in the average speed calculations.
To reset the average speed: press the button
on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐
onds.
Radio MINI Boost CD: displays on the
radio
Some computer functions can also be shown
on the radio display, refer to page 127.
Settings and information
Operating concept
Some settings and information can only be cre‐
ated or opened while the ignition is switched
on, the vehicle is standing, and the doors are
closed.
1 Button for:
▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Setting values.
▷ Confirming the selected display or set
values.
▷ Calling up computer information 62.
Symbol Function
Set the rain sensor, refer to
page 55.
Open Check-Control, refer to
page 67.
View service requirement dis‐
play, refer to page 66.
Initialize Flat Tire Monitor, refer
to page 78.
Resetting the Tire Pressure
Monitor, refer to page 80.
Set the formats and units of
measure, reset to the factory
settings, refer to page 64.
Seite 63
Displays
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Symbol Function
Personal Profile settings, refer
to page 21.
Exit the menu.
Exiting displays
1.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
2. Hold the button down.
The current speed is displayed again.
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
within approx. 8 seconds.
Next setting or information
1.
Within a setting or information display,
press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
2. Hold the button down.
Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐
formation.
Formats and units of
measure
The formats and units of measure can be set.
The settings are stored for the remote control
in use.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol shown is displayed, arrow.
▷ Fuel consumption: l/100 km, mpg,
km/l
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Displays
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Distance: km, mi.
▷ Temperature: ℃, ℉
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to change the format or
the unit of measure.
9. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
The settings are stored.
Resetting to factory settings
The settings for formats and units of measure
can be reset to the factory settings. The settings
are stored for the remote control in use.
1.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
4. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
5. Press the button repeatedly until "RESET"
appears on the display.
6. Press and hold the button until the display
changes to the first setting option.
The settings are reset.
Clock
Setting the time
Radio MINI Boost CD: set the time, refer to
page 126.
Date
Setting the date
Radio MINI Boost CD: set the date, refer to
page 126.
Seite 65
Displays
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or
switch on the ignition.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Displaying the vehicle check
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for
that operation in the tachometer.
1.
Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐
sponding symbol and "SERVICE-INFO" are
displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to display the individual
service requirement items.
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting the information.
Symbol Function
Service requirements
Engine oil
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Displays
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Symbol Function
Roadworthiness test
Front brake pads
Rear brake pads
Brake fluid
Exit the display, refer to
page 64
Next setting or information, re‐
fer to page 64
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
tems being monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lights in the instrument cluster
and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors in display
area 1 or 2.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. The Check Control
messages can be displayed later.
What to do in case of a malfunction
The meaning of each light in the event of a
malfunction and tips on how to respond are
provided in the list, refer to page 194.
Seite 67
Displays
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
secutively.
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
The stored Check Control messages can only be
displayed while the driver's door is closed.
1.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐
sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐
pear on the display.
4. Press and hold the button.
If there is no Check Control message, this is
indicated by "CHECK OK".
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding message is dis‐
played.
5. Press the button to check for other mes‐
sages.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Displays
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Lamps
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Overview
0 Lamps off / daytime running lights
1 Parking lights and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights
3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light
Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐
come lights
Parking lights/low
beams, headlight con‐
trol
General information
When the driver's door is opened with the igni‐
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐
matically switched off when the light switch is
in position 0, 2, or 3.
Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switch
position 1.
Parking lights
Switch position 1: the vehicle lights light up on
all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 70.
Low beams
Switch position 2: the low beams are lit when
the ignition is switched on.
Automatic headlight control
Switch position 3: the low beams are switched
on and off automatically depending on the am‐
bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or if
there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is
active.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the front fog lights.
Seite 69
Lamps
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐
ter the vehicle is switched off.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lights manually un‐
der these conditions.
High-beams/roadside parking lights
1 Turn signal/roadside parking light
2 Switching on the high-beams
3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight
flasher
To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐
nated on one side; note the country-specific
regulations.
The roadside parking lights drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly
long periods of time; otherwise, the battery
might not have enough power to start the en‐
gine.
Switching on the roadside parking light
To switch on the roadside parking light on the
left or right, press the turn indicator lever up or
down after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.
Switching off the roadside parking light
Press the lever up or down to the resistance
point.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switched
on.
The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐
ter the vehicle is switched off.
In switch position 1, the parking lights light up
after the ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, driving with daytime run‐
ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐
time running lights cannot be deactivated in
these cases.
1.
Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Lamps
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol shown is displayed, arrow.
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to select:
▷
Daytime running lights are activated.
▷
Daytime running lights are deactivated.
9. Hold the button down.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Welcome lights
If the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3
after the vehicle is switched off, the parking
lights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐
tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lights are
switched off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
Setting the duration
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol shown is displayed, arrow.
7. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
8. Press the button to select:
▷
The function is deactivated.
▷ ...
Select the duration, e.g. 40 seconds.
9. Hold the button down.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Seite 71
Lamps
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
Activating
With the ignition switch on, turn the light switch
to position 3, refer to page 69.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's
side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Control
is not active.
Malfunction
The warning light lights up. Adaptive
Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
More information, refer to page 194.
Fog lights
Overview
To switch on the front fog lights: press the
switch.
To switch off, press the respective switch up‐
ward or downward again.
Fog lights
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up
when the front fog lights are switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
fog lights are switched off when the headlight
flasher or the high-beams are activated.
If the automatic headlight control is activated,
refer to page 69, the low beams are switched
on automatically when the front fog lights are
switched on.
Instrument lighting
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness. The
brightness is increased to a certain limit and is
then reduced again.
▷ Press the button briefly: the brightness
changes in stages.
▷ Press and hold the button: the brightness
changes continuously.
Interior lights
The interior lights, the footwell lights and the
cargo area light are controlled automatically.
To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside
the vehicle are switched off some time after the
ignition is switched off.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Lamps
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Switching interior lights on/off
manually
To switch the interior lights on/off: press the
switch.
If the interior lights are to remain switched off,
press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lights
Reading lights are located in the front next to
the interior light and in the rear.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Front: press the switch.
Rear: press the button.
Ambient lighting
The color and brightness of the ambient light‐
ing can be changed.
Press the switch forward: the color changes in
steps.
Press the switch back: the brightness changes
in steps.
Intermediate settings and intermediate colors
are possible.
For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐
ent lighting, press the switch forward for more
than 10 seconds.
For Canadian vehicles:
Continuously changing colors of the ambient
lighting is not available.
Seite 73
Lamps
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Safety
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Airbags
The graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex‐
ample.
1 Front airbags
2 Knee airbag
3 Side airbag
4 Head airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Safety
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow
the information on optimum protective effect
of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do
not attach holders or cables such as for
navigation instruments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warning notices and information about the air‐
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec‐
trical resistance of the human body.
The front, side, and knee airbags on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly by the system.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror, refer to page 76, shows the current
status of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐
vated or activated.
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐
tions under Transporting children safely, refer
to page 45.
Seite 75
Safety
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐
ion can be detected correctly:
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐
senger seat if a child restraint fixing system
is mounted on the seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator light for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐
vated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Most child seats are detected by the system.
Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at
the time that the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. This indicates that the child seat has
been detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Safety
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Operational readiness of airbag system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐
fer to page 50, the warning light lights
up briefly to indicate that the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐
tional.
Airbag system malfunction
▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio
ready state.
▷ Warning light remains permanently on.
The airbag restraint system and belt tensioner
are not working. Have the vehicle checked im‐
mediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
sured.
Initialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Seite 77
Safety
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐
sponding symbol and "RESET" are dis‐
played.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Drive away.
Initialization is completed while the car is
traveling without feedback being given.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lights come on in yellow
and red. In addition, a signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 162, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the inflation pressure in
all four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 162, can be used for this
purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Safety
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 162.
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and
stop, otherwise, pieces of the tire could come
loose and cause an accident. Do not continue
driving. Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
The concept
The system monitors the tire pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires. Sensors in the tire valves measure
the tire pressure.
Information
To operate the system, also note the additional
information and instructions contained under
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 154.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it may
not reliably signal a loss in pressure.
Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to a new value and after
changing a tire or wheel
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Seite 79
Safety
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Performing a reset
Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to a new value and after
changing a tire or wheel.
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐
bol for the Tire Pressure Monitor and "AC‐
TIVE" are displayed. The Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor can be reset with "RESET".
5. Press and hold the button until "RESET‐
TING" is displayed.
6. Drive away.
After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h,
the set tire inflation pressures are adopted
as target values. The reset is completed au‐
tomatically as you drive.
The trip can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the reset is contin‐
ued automatically.
Low tire pressure message
The warning lights come on in yellow
and red. A Check Control message is
displayed. In addition, a signal sounds.
▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐
tion pressure on the indicated wheel.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues warnings based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 162, are la‐
beled on the tire sidewall with a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Safety
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the
Mobility System, refer to page 162, can be
used for this purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. Reset the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 162.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐
ics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. Reset the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 81
Safety
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and stop. Parts of tires can
peel away, which could cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Message indicating that the inflation
pressure needs to be checked
The yellow warning light lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected that a wheel was
changed but a reset was not performed.
▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐
fications.
▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the last
confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct
it if necessary.
▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system.
System limits
The system will not function properly if a reset
was not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire as
flat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,
e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases
the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐
creases when the tire temperature drops. In
case of severe temperature drops, this behavior
may lead to a warning on account of the de‐
fined warning limits.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes yellow
and then lights up continuously.
A Check Control message is displayed.
A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot
be detected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted.
Have it checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction:
Have system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
The yellow warning light flashes and
then lights up continuously.
A Check Control message is displayed.
A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot
be detected.
Display in the following situation:
▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices
with the same radio frequency:
After leaving the area of the disturbance,
the system automatically becomes active
again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Safety
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Seite 83
Safety
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Antilock Brake System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐
ing. This increases active driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking in curves or during a lane
change, driving stability and steering response
are improved further.
Brake assistant
When the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐
tem automatically produces the maximum
braking force boost. In this way, the system
helps keep the braking distance as short as
possible. This system utilizes all of the benefits
provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of full braking.
Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol DSC
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
appropriate driving style is always the responsi‐
bility of the driver.
DSC is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when
driving with roof load.◀
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Deactivating DSC
Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicator
lamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFF
appears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated.
Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicle
and give it forward momentum are no longer
executed.
When driving with snow chains or to rock the
vehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐
vate DSC temporarily.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the switch again; the DSC indicator lamps
in the display elements go out.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp in the tachometer
flashes: DSC is controlling the drive
forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has
failed.
The indicator lamp in the speedometer
lights up and DSC OFF appears in the
tachometer.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces.
▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off
in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Seite 85
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Activating DTC
Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamp
lights up in the speedometer and TRACTION
appears in the tachometer. Dynamic Stability
Control DSC is deactivated, Dynamic Traction
Control DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the switch again; the DSC OFF indicator
lamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in the
tachometer go out.
In the interest of better forward momentum,
brake intervention is performed in the manner
of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin
unevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp in the tachometer
flashes: DTC is controlling the drive
forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has
failed.
The indicator lamp in the speedometer
lights up and TRACTION appears in the
tachometer.
DTC is activated.
Hill drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
ALL4 all-wheel system
ALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. The
combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti‐
mize the traction and dynamic driving charac‐
teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variably
distributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles depending on the driving situation and
prevailing road conditions.
Sport button
When this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐
sponds in an even sportier manner.
▷ The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator movements.
▷ The steering responds more directly.
▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine
sounds sportier when coasting.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapid
gear changes in the Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the switch; the LED in the button lights up
and SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome‐
ter.
Deactivating the system
▷ Press the switch again.
▷ Switch the engine off.
Seite 87
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The vehicle stores and maintains the speed
specified using the controls on the steering
wheel.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Controls
Overview
1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing the
speed
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the
speed
4 Resuming cruise control
Switching on
Press button 2.
The indicator lamp lights up in the
speedometer. Cruise control is ready to
operate and can be activated.
Switch off
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Press button 2.
▷ When activated: press twice.
▷ When interrupted: press once.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The displays go out. The stored target speed is
cleared.
Interrupting
Press button 2.
The system is interrupted automatically if
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DSC intervenes.
Maintaining, storing the current speed
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Press button 1 or button 3.
The current speed is maintained and stored. It
is displayed briefly in the tachometer.
On downhill gradients, it may prove impossible
to maintain the set speed if the engine braking
power is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it may
prove impossible to maintain the set speed if
the engine power output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
Each time the button is pressed, the speed
increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desired
speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. After the button is
released, the achieved speed is maintained
and stored.
Decreasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly or hold it until the
desired speed is reached.
The functions are the same those when the
speed is increased, only that the speed is re‐
duced.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press button 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and main‐
tained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in the tachometer
The selected speed is displayed briefly.
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears
briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐
erate the system.
For better control
The indicator lamp lights up in the
speedometer. Cruise control is ready to
operate and can be activated.
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up.
The system is malfunctioning or has
failed.
Seite 89
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Park Distance Control
PDC
The concept
PDC provides support when parking in reverse.
Signal tones indicate that the vehicle is ap‐
proaching an object behind it. Measurements
are made by four ultrasound sensors in the
bumpers.
The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐
ical circumstances. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an
object quickly. Avoid driving away quickly while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Automatic operation
The system is activated after approx. one sec‐
ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐
tion R is engaged while the engine is running or
the ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐
riod before setting the vehicle into motion.
Signal tones
The closer the vehicle is to the object, the
shorter the intervals become. If the distance to
a detected object is less than approx.
12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.
If the distance remains constant, for example
when driving parallel to a wall, the signal tone
is stopped after approx. 3 seconds.
Volume
The signal tone volume can be adjusted.
Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 126.
System limits
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Malfunction
The warning light lights up. PDC is mal‐
functioning or has failed. Have the sys‐
tem checked.
To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keep
the sensors clean and free of ice. When using
high-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐
sors for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 12 in/30 cm.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Climate
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Air conditioner
1 Air volume
2 Cooling function
3 Recirculated air mode
4 Temperature
5 Rear window defroster
6 Vent settings
7 Windshield heating
Air volume
Vary the air volume. The higher
the rate, the more effective the
heating or cooling will be.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power.
Seite 91
Climate
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Switching the system on/off
Turn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0.
The blower and air conditioner are completely
switched off and the air supply is cut off.
Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐
tioning.
Cooling function
The car's interior can only be
cooled with the engine running.
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting.
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
To cool the air faster and more intensively
when external temperatures are high, switch
on the recirculated air mode.
Recirculated air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pol‐
lutants, shut off the supply to the
interior of the car temporarily.
The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-
air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off
the recirculated-air mode and increase the air
volume if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow to the windshield.
Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐
vated at low external temperatures.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Temperature
Turn upward, red, to raise the
temperature.
Turn downward, blue, to lower
the temperature.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
The rear window defroster
power may be lowered or even
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
Vent settings
Direct the flow of air to the win‐
dows
, to the upper body
area , or to the footwell .
Intermediate positions are possi‐
ble.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating switches
off automatically after some
time.
The windshield heating may be
reduced or even switched off en‐
tirely to save on battery power.
Defrosting and defogging windows
1.
Set the maximum air volume.
2. Air distribution in position .
By switching on the cooling function, the
windows are defogged more rapidly.
3. Set the highest temperature, red.
4. Deactivate recirculated air mode.
5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐
sary.
6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐
essary.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Climate
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Microfilter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐
crofilter should be changed during mainte‐
nance of your vehicle.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐
vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐
tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. The combined filter should be
changed during maintenance of your vehicle.
Automatic climate control
1 Air flow, manual
2 AUTO program
3 Recirculated air mode
4 Maximum cooling
5 Manual air distribution
6 Temperature
7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Windshield heating
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
comfortable interior temperature only.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most of these settings are stored for the remote
control in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to
page 21.
Seite 93
Climate
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Air flow, manual
Press the – button to reduce the
air volume. Press the + button to
increase the air volume.
The automatic mode for the air
volume can be switched on
again using the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
Reduce the air volume by pressing the – button
until the system is switched off. All displays go
out.
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
climate control back on.
AUTO program
The AUTO program automati‐
cally adjusts the air distribution
to the windshield and side win‐
dows, toward the upper body
area, and into the footwell. The
air volume and your specifications for the tem‐
perature are adjusted to outside influences due
to the seasons, e. g., solar radiation.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
The program is switched off if the air distribu‐
tion is manually adjusted or the button is
pressed again.
Recirculated air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pol‐
lutants, shut off the supply to the
interior of the car temporarily.
The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-
air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off
the recirculated-air mode and increase the air
volume if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow to the windshield.
Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐
vated at low external temperatures.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Maximum cooling
Automatic climate control
switches to the lowest tempera‐
ture, a high air volume, and re‐
circulated air mode.
For maximum cooling, open the
vents for the upper body area.
The air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature above
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Manual air distribution
The flow of air is directed, as se‐
lected, to the windows, to the
upper body area, or to the foot‐
well.
The automatic mode for the air
distribution can be switched back on using the
AUTO button.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature in‐
dividually.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of
the season, using maximum cooling or heating
power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Climate
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
mate control does not have sufficient time to
adjust the set temperature.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
wires are used as an antenna and are not part
of the rear window defroster.
Defrosting and defogging windows
Quickly removes ice and con‐
densation from the windshield
and front side windows. For this
purpose, also switch on the cool‐
ing function.
The windshield heating switches on automati‐
cally.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating switches
off automatically after some
time.
Cooling function
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature
setting. The car's interior can
only be cooled with the engine running.
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐
culated air mode is switched on automatically if
necessary.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally when the AUTO button is pressed.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐
vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐
tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. The combined filter should be
changed during maintenance of your vehicle.
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
2 Nozzle for direction of air flow
Opening/closing
Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow
Pivot the entire nozzle.
Seite 95
Climate
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Universal garage door
opener
The concept
The universal garage door opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or
lighting systems. The universal garage door
opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror must be programmed
for the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐
gramming procedure.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for security reasons.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the operating instructions of
the system being operated, the system
is generally compatible with the universal ga‐
rage door opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of the
Gentex Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
1 LED
2 Buttons
3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
gramming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
programmed settings of the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror are deleted.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the particular
hand-held transmitter.
4. Press the button of the desired function on
the hand-held transmitter and the button
being programmed on the interior rearview
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at
first.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release
both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐
onds, change the distance between the in‐
terior rearview mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple
trials at different distances may be neces‐
sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri‐
als.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be operated with the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror.
Special characteristics of alternating-
code radio systems
If the system cannot be operated after re‐
peated programming, check whether the sys‐
tem to be operated uses an alternating-code
system.
Read the operating instructions of the system
or press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the
interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first
and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,
the system is equipped with an alternating-
code system. This flashing LED pattern repeats
itself for approx. 20 seconds.
In systems with an alternating-code system, the
universal garage door opener and the system
must be additionally synchronized.
Please obtain additional information on syn‐
chronization in the operating instructions of the
system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.
Synchronization:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the corresponding button on the
interior rearview mirror as described.
3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Press and hold the button on the interior
rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the synchro‐
nization procedure. When synchronization
is completed, the programmed function is
executed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐
tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from
the memory buttons.
The required distance depends on the par‐
ticular hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the memory button of the universal
garage door opener.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐
prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step.
Seite 97
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐
tance and repeat the step. If programming
was aborted by the hand-held transmitter,
hold down the memory button and press
and release the button on the hand-held
transmitter several times for 2 seconds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐
ception range of the system, press and hold the
button until the function is initiated. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐
ously while the radio signal is being transmit‐
ted.
Deleting stored functions
Press the right and left buttons on the interior
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐
not be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare protection
Folding down
Fold the sun visor down.
Folding up
Fold the sun visor up.
Glare protection from the side
Folding down
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways
to the side window.
Folding up
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on
each sun visor.
To open, fold the cover up.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mirror
lighting comes on when the cover is opened.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir‐
ror
2 Display
The display shows the main or secondary com‐
pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐
tions are displayed one after the other, de‐
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
pending on how long the adjustment button is
pressed:
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
steering.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐
hicle's geographic location so that the compass
can function correctly; refer to the world map
with compass zones.
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.
The number of the compass zone set is shown
in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel
changes.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full
circle at a maximum speed of
4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐
brated, the C is replaced by the compass di‐
rections.
Seite 99
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Right-hand/left-hand steering
The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.
Briefly press the adjustment button again to
switch between English "E" and German "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Cupholders and ashtray/
lighter
Cupholders
Two cupholders are located in the center con‐
sole in the front.
MINI Countryman: two additional cupholders
are located at the end of the center console in
the rear. Additional cupholders can be installed
on the center rail.
MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo‐
cated in the console between the rear seats.
Depending on the equipment, additional cu‐
pholders can be installed on the center rail.
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Ashtray
The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders
in the center console at the front.
Emptying
Take out the entire ashtray, arrow.
When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐
serted in the cupholder with the adapter.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
Connecting electrical de‐
vices
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Socket in the center console
Remove the cover or lighter, refer to page 100,
from the socket.
Socket in the rear
MINI Countryman
Take out the cover.
MINI Paceman
Take out the cover.
Socket in the cargo area
MINI Countryman
Take out the cover.
Seite 101
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Paceman
Take out the cover.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
raised.
When closing, ensure that the cargo cover is
resting on the rubber buffers of the securing
straps; otherwise, damage may occur when
closing the tailgate.
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐
moved.
1.
Detach the securing straps from the tail‐
gate.
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
back and out of the bracket, arrow 2.
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
MINI Countryman: rear seat backrests
Observe the instructions concerning the safety
belt, refer to page 38. Otherwise, personal pro‐
tection may be compromised.
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40-20-40.
When the outer rear seat backrests are folded
down, it is not permissible for a person to travel
on the center seat.
Remove the third head restraint, refer to
page 42, if necessary.
Open the center safety belt and insert it in the
belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 40.
Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rear
seat backrests to a more upright position.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different
positions between the comfort and transport
positions and they can be folded down.
In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted
back to the greatest possible angle and in the
transport position they are nearly vertical.
Before beginning with the mounting of a child
restraint fixing system, note the instructions,
refer to page 45.
1. Hold the top of the backrest, for example
the head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar‐
row.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position
or fold it down.
Folding the backrests back up
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
When the backrests are folded back up, they
engage in the transport position.
To set the desired backrest inclination or com‐
fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loop
forward, and adjust the backrest.
MINI Paceman: rear seat backrests
1. Fold the belt buckles down.
2. Pull on the respective loop, arrow.
The backrest is unlocked.
3. Fold the backrest forward.
Folding the backrests back up
Hold the top of the backrest, for example the
head restraint, and fold it back.
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
Seite 103
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Flat loading floor
The maximum load on the loading floor is:
330 lbs, 150 kg.
Access to storage area
A storage area for items like the partition net is
found under the loading floor.
1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rear
edge of the loading floor.
2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1,
and fold it forward, arrow 2.
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Before closing the tailgate, lower the loading
floor back onto the cargo area floor.
Removing
The loading floor can be removed if necessary.
1.
Fold up the loading floor.
2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders.
3. Then remove it upward.
The folded loading floor can be stored in the
cargo area.
MINI Countryman: partition net
Before installing
1. Remove the pouch with the partition net
from the storage compartment under the
loading floor in the cargo area.
2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐
roll it, and unfold it.
After use, fold and roll up the partition net
in the same manner and place it in the
pouch so that it can be stowed back under
the cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooks
and tensioning buckles do not rest on the
rod elements.
3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
the rod elements engage.
Installation behind the front seats
1.
Take out the cargo cover if necessary.
2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
Enlarging the cargo area.
3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition net
all the way into the front holders in the
headliner, arrow 1, and push forward.
4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom of
the retaining straps on both sides to the
eyelets on the vehicle floor. Firmly attach
the partition net.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Removing
To remove and stow the partition net, proceed
in reverse order.
To fold up, press the release button, arrow.
MINI Countryman: multi-function hook
Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and
totes, for example, are located on the left and
right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping
bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only trans‐
port heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Seite 105
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
Interior
▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 106.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 107.
▷ Center rail, refer to page 107.
▷ Compartments in the center console.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the back of the front seat back‐
rests.
▷ Cupholders, refer to page 100.
▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 107.
Cargo area
▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 118.
▷ Storage compartment under the flat load‐
ing floor, refer to page 104.
▷ Multi-function hook on the cargo cover
support, refer to page 105.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle to open the lid.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Ventilation
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
glove compartment can be ventilated and, if
the cooling function is switched on, cooled.
Opening
Turn the switch in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Move the switch to the vertical position by
turning it in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Depending on the temperature setting of the
air conditioning or automatic climate control,
high temperatures may occur in the glove com‐
partment.
Center armrest
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a storage compartment or a cover for
the snap-in adapter, refer to page 145, de‐
pending on the equipment.
Do not position tall accessory parts directly on
the center rail of the center armrest; otherwise,
they may be damaged when the center arm‐
rest is opened or closed.
Center armrest front
Opening
Press the button, arrow, and pull up the lid.
Center rail
Rail segment
The rail segment can be used to secure various
objects that are placed into the rail against slip‐
ping, such as a ball point pen or smartphone.
In addition, the connection cable of the smart‐
phone can be secured using the rail segment.
1.
Twist the rail segment, arrow 1, to remove
it.
2. Insert the connection cable centrally into
the recess, arrow 2.
3. Fix the rail segment in the rail.
Clothes hooks
Clothes hooks are located on the grab handles
in the rear.
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is risk of
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
Seite 107
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
from the hooks, ensure that they will not ob‐
struct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of
injuries and risk of property damage. Only hang
lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles, from
the clothes hooks.◀
Connection for an exter‐
nal audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 132.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Seite 109
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but
do not exceed:
▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in
period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The clutch requires an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐
timal level.
During this break-in period, engage the clutch
gently.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Ground clearance
CAUTION
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler
e.g. when driving over curbs or entering into
underground car parking garages. There is risk
of property damage. Ensure that there is suffi‐
cient ground clearance available.◀
Seite 112
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
the tailgate open:
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly
increase the blower speed.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g.
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in con‐
tact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation,
idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
The vehicle's performance may be af‐
fected by interference from high frequency
radio signals. These signals are emitted by a
series of transmission systems, such as from air
traffic beacons or relay stations for mobile tele‐
communications.
If you have problems of this nature, we recom‐
mend that you consult your dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
refer to page 160.
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Using the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle stationary
with a slipping clutch for extended period; use
the parking brake instead. Otherwise, the
clutch will be subject to increased wear.
Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer to
page 86.
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐
mum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 113
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
e.g. for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐
erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐
ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission, refer to page 58.
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive load on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
engine or braking force and steering support.
There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
or with the engine switched off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
When the vehicle is parked
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
After the engine is switched off, the coolant
pump may continue running for some time in
the MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐
gine compartment.
Driving on poor roads
Your MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com‐
fortable on all streets and roads. It combines an
all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a
normal passenger car.
Seite 114
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
CAUTION
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g. stones or
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is risk
of property damage. Do not drive on unpaved
terrain.◀
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving; never take risks.
▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
The steeper and rougher the road surface
is, the lower the speed should be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
grades: the engine oil and coolant should
be filled nearly to the MAX mark.
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐
cles and drive around these where possible.
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 6 in‐
ches/15 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 12 in‐
ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly,
refer to page 85.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable
the driving stability control systems to dis‐
tribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
After driving on poor roads
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐
cle safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
Seite 115
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Loading
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally, and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of an
accident. Pay attention to the permitted load
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.◀
CAUTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀
Determining the load
limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle's placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
Seite 116
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
Load
4-seater:
5-seater:
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as
low as possible, ideally directly behind the
backrests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 104, to
protect passengers. Make sure that objects
cannot penetrate the partition net.
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.
MINI Countryman
MINI Paceman
Seite 117
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
MINI Countryman
MINI Paceman
Securing cargo
▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐
ening belts or straps.
▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo
straps.
Adhere to the information included with
the cargo straps.
▷ Eight mounting eyes are available for fas‐
tening the cargo straps.
Two of them are located on the side wall of
the cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo‐
cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar‐
rows 2.
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCH
mounting points, refer to page 48; otherwise,
these may become damaged.◀
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
Information
A special rack system is available as an optional
accessory.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available for
the movement of the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Seite 118
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Rear luggage rack
Information
A special rear rack is available as an optional
accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
rack.
Anchorage points
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
The anchorage points are under the covers in
the bumper.
Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐
outs.
Loading
When loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐
proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loads
are not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐
cations in the technical data.
Seite 119
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. The implementation of certain
measures, driving style and regular mainte‐
nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐
tion and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or
rear luggage racks after use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close both windows
Open windows causes higher air resistance and
thus increases fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure, refer to page 154, at least twice
a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To
achieve this, maintain a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
Seite 120
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the
highest applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and coast in a suitable gear.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance car‐
ried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a MINI dealer’s service center.
For information on the MINI Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 172.
Seite 121
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
ROCK ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Radio MINI Boost CD
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Overview
1 Change the audio sources.
2 On/off, volume.
▷ Press: switch on/off.
▷ Turn: adjust the volume.
3 Show the tone settings.
4 Function buttons for selecting the menu
items shown directly above them on the
display.
5 Change the station or track.
6 Display.
7 Select the functions.
▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on the
display or set the value.
▷ Press: select the highlighted menu item
or store the settings.
8 Place/end calls.
9 Open the main menu.
10 Manually select the frequency.
Seite 124
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
11 CD slot. 12 Eject the CD.
Representation in the Owner's Manual
"…" Identifies radio display texts used to select
individual functions.
Menu navigation
Radio and telephone functions can be opened
using buttons on the radio and menus.
Opening menu items
To display the menu items:
▷
Press the button once for the audio
sources menu.
▷
Press the button for the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
There are several ways to select a menu item
on the display.
Using the right knob
▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,
arrow 2.
▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,
arrow 1.
Using the function buttons
Press the left or right side of the function
button under the menu item.
If only one menu item is displayed above the
function button, press the middle of the button.
Via the MODE button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired audio menu is selected.
Symbols on the display
Symbol Meaning
Function is selected.
Function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Leave the menu, one menu back.
Display additional menu items.
Scroll display. The list contains more
than two entries.
Change to the higher level directory.
Setting values
For setting numerical values or values on a
scale:
1.
Mark the desired menu item and press the
right knob.
2. Turn the right knob to set the value.
3. Press the right knob to store the value.
Switching on/off
Press the left knob. The radio selects the audio
source set last: radio, satellite radio, CD, exter‐
nal audio device, or USB audio interface.
Listening to the radio with the ignition
switched off
When the radio ready state or the ignition is
switched off, the radio functions are available
Seite 125
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
for approx. 20 minutes. To listen to the radio,
switch it back on.
To spare the battery, ensure that the radio is
switched off when you leave the vehicle.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the left knob. Settings are stored for the
remote control currently in use.
When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐
tem, the audio sources are muted.
Speed-dependent volume and volumes
of PDC signal tone and gong
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone com‐
pared to the audio sources.
▷ "GONG": volume of the gong compared to
the audio sources.
▷ "S-VOL": speed-dependent volume control.
Set the audio sources to a high volume to be
able to adjust the volume of the signal tones
more easily.
1. Press the button.
2. Select the symbol if necessary.
3. Select the desired volume setting.
4. Set the desired volume and press the right
knob.
Volume of external audio devices
An external audio device such as an MP3 player
can be connected via the AUX-IN port in the
center console and the audio tracks can be
played over the car's loudspeaker system.
The volume of the external audio device can be
adjusted to the car radio.
1. Press the button.
2. "AUX"
3. "Vol-AUX"
4. Set the desired volume and press the right
knob.
Tone settings
▷ "BASS": depth adjustment.
▷ "TREBLE": treble adjustment.
▷ "FADER": front/rear volume distribution.
▷ "BAL": left/right volume distribution.
The sound settings are set globally for all audio
sources.
Setting the treble, bass, and volume
distribution
1.
Press the button.
2. Highlight the desired tone setting and press
the right knob.
3. Create the desired setting and press the
right knob.
Resetting the tone settings
The tone settings are reset to medium values.
1. Press the button.
2. "RESET"
Time
Setting the time, date, and time format
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "CONFIG"
4. "TIME"
5. Select the desired category.
6. Create the settings and press the right
knob.
Seite 126
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Setting the units of measure of the
computer and the language
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "CONFIG"
4.
▷ "DIST": change the unit of measure for
the range.
▷ "LANG": select the language of the dis‐
play texts.
▷ "CONSMP": change the unit of measure
for the average fuel consumption.
▷ "TEMP": change the unit of measure for
the external temperature.
5. Highlight the desired menu item and press
the button.
6. Create the desired setting.
Computer
The following vehicle information can be call up
via the computer:
▷ Average fuel consumption
▷ Average speed
▷ Range
Displaying information
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "COMP"
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To start calculation of the average fuel con‐
sumption:
1.
"CONSMP"
2. "RESET"
The previous display is set to zero and the sys‐
tem begins recalculating the average fuel con‐
sumption.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the time
during which the engine is running.
To start calculation of the average speed:
1. "SPEED"
2. "RESET"
Estimated range
"RANGE"
The display shows the estimated distance that
can be still be driven on the remaining fuel,
taking into consideration the driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Radio
Listening to the radio
The radio is designed for reception in the FM
and AM wavebands.
1.
Switch on the radio, refer to page 125.
2.
Press this button if necessary.
3. "TUNER"
4. "FM" or"AM"
Press the corresponding button repeatedly
until the desired waveband is displayed.
▷ FM: FM1, FM2, FMA
▷ AM: AM, AMA
Selecting a station
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Next station
Press the button.
Seite 127
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The next station with reception is selected.
Selecting the station manually by
frequency
1.
Press the button.
2.
▷ Press the respective function button to
set the desired frequency.
▷ Turn the right knob until the desired
frequency is set.
Automatically updating the stations
with the best reception, AUTOSTORE
In the FMA and AMA memory levels, stations
are automatically stored according to their re‐
ception strength. If the AUTOSTORE function is
not used, six stations can be manually stored in
each of the FMA and AMA memory levels.
1.
"FM" or"AM"
Press the corresponding button until the
following is displayed:
"AUTOSTORE"
It may take several seconds for the stations to
be stored and for one of these stations to be
played back.
Briefly playing and selecting a station
"SC"
All stations with reception are played briefly.
To interrupt the function and select a station:
"SC"
Storing and retrieving a station
Memory locations
It is possible to store up to 30 stations.
▷ FM1, FM2, AM: six stations each.
▷ FMA, AMA: the six stations with the best re‐
ception (automatically) or any six stations
(manually).
Storing a station
1. "FM" or"AM"
Select the desired function repeatedly until
the desired waveband is displayed.
2. Select the station.
3. "1" ... "6"
Press and hold the function button under
the desired memory location until the sta‐
tion is audible again after a brief interrup‐
tion.
Retrieving a stored station
1.
"FM" or"AM"
Select the desired function repeatedly until
the desired waveband is displayed.
2. "1" ... "6"
Press and hold the desired function button
or turn the right knob until the desired sta‐
tion is displayed.
Radio Data System, RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name or text messages, in the FM
waveband. When playing a station with multi‐
ple frequencies, the system automatically
switches to the frequency with the best recep‐
tion, if needed.
Some stations broadcast the type of program
received, or PTY, via RDS. This information is
displayed briefly when the station is selected,
for instance NEWS.
PTY can also be used to display catastrophe
alerts, such as "ALARM".
The alert is issued on the loudspeakers.
Switching the RDS on/off
1.
"SET"
2. "RDS"
When the RDS is switched off, the PTY function
is switched off as well.
Seite 128
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Switching the program type display
on/off
1. "SET"
2. "PTY"
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐
tal signals. These stations can be received digi‐
tally and therefore with better sound quality. A
digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
License conditions
HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐
marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. Press the button.
2. "TUNER"
3. "SET"
4. "HD"
Displays
▷ "HD": a station is received digitally.
▷ "(HD)": a station broadcasts digital signals
but digital radio reception is switched off.
In areas in which the selected station is not
continuously received in digital mode, playback
switches between analog and digital reception.
In this case, switch off digital radio reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital
station
Some stations broadcast multiple programs. To
select one of these programs:
1. Press the button repeatedly
until the desired digital station is displayed.
If a station broadcasts multiple programs,
the following display appears, for example:
"HD1"
2. "LIST"
3. "HD1" ... "HD8" Select the desired pro‐
gram. Up to eight programs can be se‐
lected per station.
Displaying additional information
For digital stations, additional information can
be displayed on the current track, such as the
name of the artist.
"INFO"
Operational displays
▷ "acquiring": the system is looking for digital
stations.
▷ "No Signal": no digital stations are being re‐
ceived.
Satellite radio
Over 100 different channels with high fidelity
can be received. The channels are offered in
fixed packages and must be activated.
You may experience signal drops and muting
events related to this new technology.
Activating or deactivated channels
1. Press the button.
2. "SAT"
3. "CAT"
4. Select the desired category.
The channels are displayed.
This symbol identifies the current chan‐
nel.
Activating
1.
Turn the right knob to select a channel that
is not yet activated.
2. Press the right knob to confirm a channel.
Seite 129
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
A phone number and the electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed. The electronic
serial number is required for activation.
3. To have the channels activated, call the
phone number.
Deactivating
1.
Press the button.
2. "SAT"
3. "SAT"
Hold the button down.
A phone number and the electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed. The electronic
serial number is required for deactivation.
4. To have the channels deactivated, call the
phone number.
Selecting and storing a channel
1. Press the button.
2. "SAT"
3. "CAT"
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired channel.
To display all channels:
"ALL"
To store a channel:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. "SAT"
Press the button repeatedly until the de‐
sired memory level, SAT 1 or SAT 2, is
reached.
3. "1" ... "6"
Press and hold the function button under
the desired memory location until the
channel is audible again after a brief inter‐
ruption.
Changing to the current channel
"CURR"
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor‐
mation on the current track are displayed, such
as the name of the artist.
1. Select the desired channel.
2. "INFO"
Changing the channel using the buttons
Press the button for the corre‐
sponding direction. The next enabled channel
is opened.
Search
1. Press and hold the button for
the corresponding direction. The activated
channels appear on the display one after
the other.
2. Release the button to select the displayed
channel.
Information
When there is a signal blockage or the trans‐
mission is suspended momentarily for more
than 4 seconds, a message will appear on the
display.
Service may be interrupted or unavailable for
specific reasons such as environmental or topo‐
graphic conditions and others that Satellite
Radio cannot directly control. Signal may not be
available under tunnels, in parking garages,
next to tall buildings, nearby trees with dense
foliage, nearby mountains or other possible
strong sources of radio interference. Service
should resume normally after the source of sig‐
nal unavailability has been cleared.
CD player
Loading the CD player
Insert the CD into the CD drive with the printed
side up.
Seite 130
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting the CD player
A CD is contained in the CD player.
1. Switch on the car radio if necessary.
2.
Press the button.
3. "CD"
Skipping to another track
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired track is played.
With the right knob:
Turn the right knob until the desired track is
played back.
Fast forward/reverse
Hold the button down.
Tracks can be heard but are distorted.
Briefly playing and selecting a track
"SC"
All tracks are played briefly one after the other.
To interrupt the function and select a track:
"SC"
Random playback
"RND"
To end random playback:
"RND"
Compressed audio files
CD players can play back CDs with compressed
audio data: MP3 and WMA.
Selecting a track
1. "LIST"
2. Select the desired directory using the right
knob.
▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐
rectory.
▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐
rectory.
3. Select other directories if you wish.
4. Highlight the desired track and press the
right knob.
You can scroll through the directories during
playback.
To change to the current track:
"CURR"
Displaying information on the track
Any information stored on the currently se‐
lected track can be displayed.
1.
"LIST"
2. "TRACK"
Ejecting a CD from the CD player
Press the button.
The CD emerges slightly from the CD drive.
Operational displays
▷ "Insert CD"
The CD slot is empty.
▷ "Error CD"
The CD cannot be read or is not working.
▷ "Temp. CD"
Operating temperature is too high.
Seite 131
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Information
CD player
WARNING
CD/DVD players and changers are offi‐
cially designated Class 1 laser products. Lasers
can damage the retina of the eye. There is risk
of injuries. Do not use the CD/DVD player or
changer, if the cover is damaged.◀
CDs
CAUTION
With use of non-compatible CD sizes, the
CD can get jammed and it may not be possible
to pull it out again. Labels applied after the fact
can loosen during playback. There is risk of
property damage.
▷ Do not use any CDs with labels applied after
the fact.
▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐
ter of 4.7 inches/12 cm and do not play
back any CDs with adapters, e.g. single CDs.
▷ Do not use any combined CD/DVDs, e. g.
DVD Plus.◀
General malfunctions
▷ The CD players have been optimized for
performance in vehicles. In some instances
they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs
than stationary devices would be.
▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it has
been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐
porarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with particular CDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs,
this can be due to one of the following causes:
Self-recorded CDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation
or recording processes, or poor quality or
old age of the blank CD.
▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a pen
intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over
50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐
light.
CDs with copy protection
CDs are often provided with a copy protection
feature by the manufacturer. This can mean
that some CDs cannot be played or can only be
played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -
may only be used for private purposes. Copying
of this technology is prohibited.
External devices
AUX-IN port
Overview
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
Seite 132
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center
console.
Connect the headphone connec‐
tor or line-out connector of the
device to the AUX-IN port.
Ensure that the connector is inserted all the
way into the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1.
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2.
Press the button.
3. "AUX"
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs
markedly from the volume of the other audio
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1. Press the button.
2. "AUX"
3. "Vol-AUX"
4. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
USB audio interface
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ External audio devices, e.g. MP3 player:
connection via AUX-IN socket.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
page 145, when equipped with the music
interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐
sured that every audio device/mobile phone is
operable on the vehicle. Further information is
available at www.mini.com/connectivity or
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
Seite 133
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.
Connecting
The USB audio interface is in the
center console.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
audio interface
To connect the iPod, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod. Further information
is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop or
on the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivity
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-
IN port and USB interface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐
tect the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
Audio device
Connect the headphone connector or line-out
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port of
the USB audio interface.
Ensure that the connector is inserted all the
way into the AUX-IN port.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or
type of music, as well as playback lists are
transmitted into the vehicle. This may take
some time, depending on the USB device and
the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 20,000 tracks are stored, information on
existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. Press the button.
2. "IPOD" or "USB" or "AUX"
Changing the music track
Skipping to another track
It is possible to skip to another track within the
selected directory.
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired track is played.
With the right knob:
Turn the right knob until the desired track is
played back.
Fast forward/reverse
Hold the button down.
Tracks can be heard but are distorted.
Seite 134
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio MINI Boost CD
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Random playback
"RND"
To end random playback: "RND"
Selecting a track
Depending on the connected device, the track
can be selected via the following category:
▷ "LIST": playback lists.
▷ "GEN": musical genre.
▷ "ART": artist.
▷ "ALB": album.
1. Select the desired category.
2. If necessary, select the desired directory us‐
ing the right knob.
▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐
rectory.
▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐
rectory.
3. Select other directories if you wish.
4. Highlight the desired track and press the
right knob.
You can scroll through the directories during
playback.
To change to the current track:
"CURR"
Displaying information on the track
Any information stored on the currently se‐
lected track can be displayed.
"TRACK"
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs
markedly from the volume of the other audio
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
1.
"LEV"
2. Turn the right knob until the desired vol‐
ume is set and press the knob.
Information
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ It is only possible to connect one iPod/
iPhone to the vehicle at a time.
▷ Playback from the iPod/iPhone is only pos‐
sible via the USB audio interface if a snap-in
adapter is not used.
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐
ally connect the device to a socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
promised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Seite 135
Radio MINI Boost CD
ENTERTAINMENT
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
CONNECT ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Telephone
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐
cle via Bluetooth.
After a compatible mobile phone is paired with
the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile
phone via the radio, the buttons on the steer‐
ing wheel, and via voice activation.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by
the mobile phone provider or service provider.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside
antenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
Compatible mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones with a Blue‐
tooth interface are supported by the mobile
phone preparation package can be obtained at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Information
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
Control elements
1 Display.
2 Function buttons for selecting the menu
items shown directly above them on the
display.
3 Redial, accept a call, start dialing, terminate
a call and change to the Telephone menu.
Seite 138
COMMUNICATION
Telephone
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
4 ▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on the
display or set the value.
▷ Press: select the highlighted menu item
or store the setting.
5 Open the main menu.
6 On/off, volume control.
Menu navigation
Selecting menu items
There are two ways to select a menu item on
the display.
Using the right knob
▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,
arrow 2.
▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,
arrow 1.
Using the function buttons
Press the left or right side of the function
button under the menu item.
If only one menu item is displayed above the
function button, press the middle of the button.
Representation in the Owner's Manual
"…" Identifies radio display texts used to select
individual functions.
Symbols on the display
Symbol Meaning
Function is selected.
Leave the menu, one menu back.
Display additional menu items.
Scroll display. The list contains more
than two entries.
Reception of the wireless network:
the display depends on the signal
strength.
Using the hands-free system.
Roaming is active.
Pairing/unpairing the
mobile phone
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is compatible, refer to
page 138.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐
nection without confirmation or visibility,
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐
mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
Seite 139
Telephone
COMMUNICATION
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
To activate the connection:
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "BT-ON"
To deactivate the connection again:
1. "BT"
2. "BT-OFF"
3. "YES"
Pairing and connecting
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐
dent.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. If necessary stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "BT"
5. "PAIR"
Turn the right knob to display the Bluetooth
name of your vehicle.
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
You are prompted by the radio or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐
key.
8. Enter the passkey on the mobile phone and
confirm it.
9. "ADD"
10. Enter the same passkey on the radio using
the function buttons and confirm it.
To delete the last digit: "DELETE"
11. "OK"
Press twice if necessary.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone ap‐
pears on the radio display.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 141.
Repeating the pairing procedure/help
If pairing failed:
1.
"REPEAT"
2. Repeat steps 6 to 10.
To display the Customer Relations phone num‐
ber: "CALLS"
Turn the right knob to display the Customer Re‐
lations phone number and information needed
for pairing.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition
is switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Seite 140
COMMUNICATION
Telephone
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "BT"
5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone
to be connected is displayed.
6. "PRIO"
Press the button repeatedly until the de‐
sired position is reached.
Unpairing the mobile phone
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "BT"
5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone
to be unpaired is displayed.
6. "DELETE"
7. "YES"
What to do if...
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐
fer to page 138.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth on
the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and on
the radio.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair
and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts?
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to
extreme environmental conditions.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers.
Seite 141
Telephone
COMMUNICATION
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline or a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Controls
▷ Accept/reject a call.
▷ Dial a phone number.
▷ Dial a phone number from the phone book.
▷ Dial a stored phone number, such as from
the list of accepted calls.
▷ End the call.
When the ignition and the radio ready state are
switched off, such as after the remote control is
removed, an existing call can be continued for
up to 25 minutes on the hands-free system.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. Settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The ringer volume of incoming calls and the call
volume can be adjusted independently.
When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐
tem, the audio sources are muted.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
"MUTE"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated when a new con‐
nection is established.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
Accepting a call
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or radio.
or
"YES"
Rejecting a call
"NO"
Ending a call
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or radio.
or
"END"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "#"
5. Enter the desired phone number on the
buttons 0–9.
Seite 142
COMMUNICATION
Telephone
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
To delete the last digit: "DEL"
6.
Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel or radio.
or
Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐
ber.
Phone book
Dialed phone numbers, incoming calls and en‐
tries in the phone book are stored on lists if the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth.
Five lists are available:
▷ "A-Z"
Entries of the phone book of the SIM card
or of the mobile phone, which consist of a
name and phone number, are sorted in al‐
phabetical order.
▷ "TOP8"
The Top 8 list contains the eight phone
numbers that were dialed most frequently.
▷ "LAST8"
The last eight phone numbers that were di‐
aled are stored. The phone number dialed
last is at the top of the list.
▷ "CALLS"
The phone numbers of the last eight ac‐
cepted calls are stored. For this to be possi‐
ble, it must be possible to transmit the
phone number of the caller.
▷ "MISSED"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
that were not accepted are stored. For this
to be possible, it must be possible to trans‐
mit the phone number of the caller.
Dialing a phone number from the phone
book
The list A-Z is available for phone book entries.
If entries with different names but the same
phone number are transferred to the vehicle
from the mobile phone, only one entry is dis‐
played.
The display of the phone book entries on the
radio may differ from the display on the mobile
phone, such as the order of the first and last
names.
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. "A-Z"
5. The arrows indicate that additional
letters can be displayed.
Turn the right knob to display additional
letters if necessary.
6. Turn the right knob to select the first letter
of the entry.
7. Select the entry with the function button.
The phone number is dialed.
To display all entries:
1.
Turn the right knob to select the first letter
of the entry and press the knob.
2. Turn the right knob to select the desired
entry and press the knob.
or
Press the button on the steering
wheel or radio to dial the number.
The phone number is dialed.
Editing and dialing a phone number
from the phone book
You can edit the phone number of an entry be‐
fore making a call. This change is not stored in
the phone book.
1.
Selecting an entry.
2. "EDIT"
3. To delete a digit: "DEL"
Seite 143
Telephone
COMMUNICATION
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
4. Enter additional digits on the buttons 0–9.
5. Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐
ber.
Dialing a phone number from the phone
book using the buttons on the steering
wheel
1.
Press and hold the button to dis‐
play the Telephone menu.
2. Press the arrow buttons on the steering
wheel to leaf through the phone book.
3.
Press the button to dial the phone
number.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1.
Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "PHONE"
4. Select a list, for instance "TOP8"
5. Turn the right knob to select an entry and
press the knob to dial the phone number.
Deleting an individual entry
1.
Select an entry from the list.
2. "DEL"
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for
this purpose.
This function is only available if a connection
exists and if the hands-free system is being
used.
1.
"KEYPAD"
2. Enter the DTMF code on the buttons 0–9.
3. If necessary, press and hold the function
button on the right or left to enter special
characters.
Displaying the call duration
During a call:
"DURAT"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system
automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐
tem.
If the system does not switch over automati‐
cally, follow the instructions on the mobile
phone display; refer also to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone
display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐
ing instructions.
MINI phone numbers
When the ignition is switched on, various serv‐
ice phone numbers can be displayed.
Seite 144
COMMUNICATION
Telephone
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ "Road Assist": Roadside Assistance, if help
is required in the event of a breakdown.
▷ "Serv. Appt.": MINI service center, if a serv‐
ice appointment needs to be arranged.
▷ "Cust Relat": Customer Relations, for infor‐
mation on all aspects of your vehicle.
Displaying the phone numbers
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion.
2.
Press the button.
3. "MINI"
4. Turn the right knob until the desired phone
number is displayed.
Snap-in adapter
General information
For more information about snap-in adapters
that support the functions of the mobile phone
in a compatible way, contact a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Information
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the
cover, arrow 2.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
To remove:
To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐
ton.
Inserting the mobile phone
1.
Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐
Seite 145
Telephone
COMMUNICATION
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
row 1, and press it down until it engages,
arrow 2.
The battery is charged beginning with the radio
ready state of the vehicle.
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐
bile phone, arrow 2.
Seite 146
COMMUNICATION
Telephone
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Seite 147
Telephone
COMMUNICATION
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Open fuel filler flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuel
vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of inju‐
ries or risk of property damage. Pay attention
that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
can be released manually:
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Seite 150
MOBILITY
Refueling
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow.
2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump
symbol.
This opens the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following
when refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumed
twice after the filler nozzle switches off for the
first time.
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
On contact with painted surfaces, damage may
occur to these surfaces. The environment is
polluted. There is risk of property damage.
Avoid overfilling.◀
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re‐
serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Seite 151
Refueling
MOBILITY
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Fuel
Fuel recommendation
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel
pump as containing metals.
CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
CAUTION
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different recommended fuel
grades.
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
MINI recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not
comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
Seite 152
MOBILITY
Fuel
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 153
Fuel
MOBILITY
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure.
Checking the pressure
Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all
four tires.
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,
and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a month
and before a long trip.◀
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation
pressure increases along with the tire's temper‐
ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications
apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐
ture.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 80
or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 78.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table contains all tire
inflation pressure specifications for the speci‐
fied tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The
tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
for the vehicle type.
For correct identification of the right tire infla‐
tion pressures, observe the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
MINI Countryman:
Seite 154
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Paceman:
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.
Seite 155
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 209.
Seite 156
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.
Seite 157
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds of up to
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds above
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table
are indicated in bar/PSI with cold
tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 210.
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the
tire makes it easier to identify and choose the
right tires.
Tire size
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
225: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
DOT xxxx xxx 2214
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2214: tire age
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Seite 158
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving hab‐
its, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
page 162.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
The tread depth should not be less than
0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation,
for example, requires a minimum tread depth
of only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths less
than 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger of
hydroplaning even in low water depths and at
raised speeds.
Winter tires
The suitability of winter tires for winter driving
is reduced noticeably when their tread depth
becomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.
Seite 159
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐
uted around the circumference of the tire and
are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator. When the tire tread has been
worn down to the wear indicators, a tread has
reached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
road damage and similar situations.
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is risk of an accident. Do not repair dam‐
aged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Tire age
Recommendation
For several reasons, among other things be‐
cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐
turer of your MINI recommends mounting new
tires at the latest after six years, regardless of
the actual wear.
Manufacture date
The date of manufacture of the tires is specified
in the tire label:
DOT … 2015: the tire was manufactured in
week 20 of 2015.
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 160
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the right wheel/tire combina‐
tion and wheel rim versions for your vehicle can
be obtained from the dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g. due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident.◀
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 79. A dealer’s service
center will be glad to answer any questions you
may have.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. The sign is available from the tire dealer
or from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Seite 161
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-
flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compact
wheel is not available in case of a flat tire. A
dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
any questions you may have.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns occur on the front and
rear axles, depending on the individual condi‐
tions of use.
To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheels
can be rotated between the axles. A dealer’s
service center will be glad to answer any ques‐
tions you may have.
After changing the tires, check the tire inflation
pressure and correct it if necessary.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires are tires that support themselves
for a limited period of time, and they may also
come with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐
ment ensures that the tire can continue to be
used to a limited extent if it has lost pressure
and even if it has become completely depres‐
surized.
For continued driving in the event of a flat tire,
refer to page 78.
Correcting a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch
on the hazard warning system.
▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position, set
the parking brake, and engage first gear or
reverse, or engage selector lever position P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazard
warning lamp is required, set it up on the
roadside at an appropriate distance from
the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all
safety guidelines and regulations.
The procedure to correct a flat tire depends on
the equipment in the vehicle:
▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 162.
▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 162.
MINI Mobility System
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant bottle.
Seite 162
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if tire damage is greater than approx.
1/8 in/4 mm in size.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
Sealant and compressor
1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker
2 Filling hose
Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.
3 Holder for the sealant bottle
4 Compressor
5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/
socket in passenger compartment 101.
6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐
pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐
sor and wheel
7 On/off switch
8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐
tion pressure
9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐
tion pressure
The connector, cable, and connecting hose are
stowed in the compressor housing.
Using the Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
▷ Filling the tire with sealant
▷ Distributing the sealant
▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the
compressor housing and screw it onto the
sealant bottle connection. Ensure that the
connection hose is not kinked.
3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐
sor housing in a vertical position.
4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of the
not working wheel and screw the filling
hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.
6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/
socket in the passenger compartment, refer
to page 101.
7. When the engine is running:
Seite 163
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant into
the tire and achieve a tire inflation pressure
of approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi.
While sealant is being filled, the inflation
pressure may intermittently rise to approx.
5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐
pressor in this phase.
8. Switch off the compressor.
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not
reached:
1.
Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel
and drive forward and back approx.
33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealant
in the tire.
2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still
not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6
from the sealant bottle.
3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle with the free connector on the seal‐
ant bottle.
This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐
ing from the bottle.
4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable
material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐
ute the sealant.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If
possible, do not drop below a speed of
10 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or
about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐
tion.
2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve.
3. Insert the connector 5 into the power
socket in the passenger compartment.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running:
▷ To increase the inflation pressure:
switch on the compressor. To check the
currently set inflation pressure, switch
off the compressor.
▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: press
the release button 9.
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
If the inflation pressure is not maintained, take
the vehicle on another drive, distributing the
sealant, refer to page 164. Then repeat steps
1 to 4 once.
If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still
not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Replace the not working tire as soon as possi‐
ble and have the wheel balanced.
Seite 164
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Have the Mobility System refilled.
Snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with tires of the following size:
195/60 R 16 M+S
With ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snow
chains on the front wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐
strument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐
ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activate
DTC, refer to page 84.
Seite 165
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Battery, under the cover 182
3 Dip stick for engine oil 168
4 Engine oil filler neck 168
5 Coolant expansion tank 170
6 Engine compartment fuse box 183
7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight
and window washer system 57
Seite 166
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
personal and property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Unlocking and opening the hood
1.
Pull the lever.
2. Lift the hood all the way.
3. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
Closing the hood
Close the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be
clearly heard to engage.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 167
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
driving style, for example, results in considera‐
bly higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level with a dip stick
1.
Park the vehicle on level ground when the
engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐
ter driving continuously for at least
6 2 miles/10 km.
2. Switch the engine off.
3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip
stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth,
paper towel, etc.
4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way into
the measuring tube and pull it out again.
The oil level must be between the two
marks on the dip stick.
The oil quantity between the two marks on the
dip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.
Do not exceed the high mark of the dip stick.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of oil only after the corresponding message ap‐
pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐
gines, after the oil level is just above the low
mark of the dip stick, refer to page 168.
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Add engine oil within the next
30 miles/50 km.◀
Seite 168
MOBILITY
Engine oil
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have excess engine oil suctioned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
Engine oil types to add
Information
CAUTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use oil
additives.◀
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk of
property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and
SAE 5W-30.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information regarding suitable engine
oil ratings and viscosities can be obtained from
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
API SL or superior oil rating
Engine oil change
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 169
Engine oil
MOBILITY
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
General information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of in‐
juries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information regarding
suitable additives is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine over‐
heat, a warning lamp lights up, refer to
page 194.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape; then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the markings. The markings are located on
the side of the coolant reservoir.
Refilling
1.
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐
ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
Seite 170
MOBILITY
Coolant
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
4. Twist the cap closed.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environ‐
mental protection regulations when dis‐
posing of coolant additives.
Seite 171
Coolant
MOBILITY
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
MINI maintenance system
The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐
mation on required maintenance measures and
thus provides support in maintaining road
safety and the operational reliability of the ve‐
hicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the various driving conditions of your
MINI. Based on this, Condition Based Service
determines the current and future mainte‐
nance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Detailed information on service requirements
can be displayed in the tachometer, refer to
page 66.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Make sure the date is set correctly; otherwise,
the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice is not ensured.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
Seite 172
MOBILITY
Maintenance
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
CAUTION
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Primary components in the vehicle emissions
can be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐
vice.
Emissions
The warning lamps light up. The vehicle
is producing higher emissions. Further
driving at a moderate pace is possible.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
flashes or lights up continuously. This indicates
that there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐
tion in the engine. In this situation, decrease
the vehicle speed and immediately drive to a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Serious engine
misfiring within a brief period can seriously
damage emission control components, in par‐
ticular the catalytic converter. In addition, the
mechanical engine components may become
damaged.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐
ened, the OBD system may conclude
that fuel vapor is escaping; this will
cause a display to light up. If the filler cap is
then tightened, the display should go out in a
few days.
Seite 173
Maintenance
MOBILITY
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Wiper blade replacement
General information
CAUTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
mechanism toward the front.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation
until it engages audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Changing the rear wiper blade
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
1.
Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar‐
row.
Seite 174
MOBILITY
Replacing components
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
3. Press the wiper blade against the stop to
push it out of the fixation.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation
until it engages audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment
Information
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐
tion when handling lights and bulbs.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the necessary work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or it is not described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
CAUTION
Contaminated bulbs reduce their service
life. There is risk of property damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Caring for the headlights, refer to page 191.
For bulb replacement procedures that are not
described here, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
In some equipment, the light source is provided
by light-emitting diodes behind a cover.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources for an extended period of
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
you drive with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Bi-xenon headlights
These bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐
hood of failure is very low, provided that they
are not switched on and off excessively. If a
bulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue
Seite 175
Replacing components
MOBILITY
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
driving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐
vided this is permitted by local laws.
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Front lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Headlights
1 Low beams/high-beams
2 Turn signal
Lower front lights
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights or fog lights
Lower LED front lights
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Fog lights
Halogen low beams and high-beams
H13 bulb, 60/55 watt
Access to the bulbs through the engine
compartment
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 175.
Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changed
from the engine compartment.
To remove the cover:
1.
Press the tab.
2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the
holder.
Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.
Seite 176
MOBILITY
Replacing components
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Replacing the bulb
1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove it, arrow 2.
2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off the
connector, arrow 2.
3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LED
daytime running lights
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 175.
Lights are implemented using LED technology.
In case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Turn signals/parking lights/roadside
parking lights/fog lights/and daytime
running lights
Access to the bulbs via the wheel housing
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 175.
1 Turn signal
2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog
lights/and daytime running lights
Replacing the turn signal bulb
21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn
the cover counterclockwise.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐
move it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the covers
in reverse order.
Seite 177
Replacing components
MOBILITY
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Replacing the parking light bulb and
roadside parking light bulb
5-watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Replacing the front fog light bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watt
1.
Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.
4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Replacing the daytime running light bulb
Bulb PSX24W
1. Turn the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.
4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs and
pull out.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Lateral turn signals
5-watt bulb, W 5 W
1.
Open the hood.
2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove the
bulb holder.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the left
and replace it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
reverse order.
Seite 178
MOBILITY
Replacing components
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Side marker lights
To replace these bulbs, contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 175.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W
MINI Countryman
1 Brake/tail light
2 Turn signal
3 Brake/tail light
4 Backup light
MINI Paceman
1 Brake light
2 Tail light
3 Turn signal
4 Backup light
Replacing
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
MINI Countryman
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Press the cover out of the cargo area side
panel at the rear and remove it.
4. Detach the emergency release of the fuel
filler flap, refer to page 150, and push it
aside with the foam insert.
Ensure that the emergency release is not
damaged.
5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing
down the clip, arrow 1.
6. Take out the bulb holder and detach the
cable, arrow 2.
7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left and remove it.
8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb
holder in reverse order. Ensure that the
bulb holder engages in all fasteners.
Seite 179
Replacing components
MOBILITY
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
9. Return the foam insert to its original posi‐
tion and reattach the emergency release of
the fuel filler flap.
10. Reattach the cover.
MINI Paceman
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side
trim.
4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, by
turning.
5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hex
key from the vehicle document portfolio.
6. Remove the tail light.
7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing
down the clip, arrows 1.
8. Take out the bulb holder and detach the
cable, arrow 2.
9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left and remove it.
10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb
holder in reverse order. Ensure that the
bulb holder engages in all fasteners.
License plate lights
5-watt bulb, C 5 W
Replacing
MINI Countryman
1.
Push the light to the left in the catch of the
light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐
row 1.
2. Take out the light, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the light.
Seite 180
MOBILITY
Replacing components
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Paceman
1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the
light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐
row 1.
2. Take out the light, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the light.
Center brake light
This light uses LED technology for operation. In
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Changing wheels
Information
The vehicle may be equipped with conven‐
tional tires with the Mobility System, refer to
page 162, or with run-flat tires, refer to
page 162.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
tire.
The suitable tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch
on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and move the selec‐
tor lever to position P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazard
warning lamp is required, set it up on the
roadside at an appropriate distance from
the rear of the vehicle.
▷ Change the wheel only on a level, firm sur‐
face which is not slippery. The vehicle or
the jack could slip to the side if you attempt
to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery sur‐
face such as snow, ice, tiles, etc.
▷ Do not use a wooden block or similar object
as a support base for the jack, as this would
prevent it from extending to its full support
height and reduce its load-carrying ca‐
pacity.
▷ To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie un‐
der the vehicle, and never start the engine
while it is supported by the jack.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Seite 181
Replacing components
MOBILITY
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐
perate climate conditions.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
any questions you may have.
Battery replacement
CAUTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that
any Check Control messages of these comfort
features are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the
engine is switched off. Connections, refer to
page 184.
General information
Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to
achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in
the following cases:
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to
travel short distances.
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
Power failure
After a temporary power failure, some equip‐
ment will be restricted in its use and will need
to be reinitialized. In addition, certain individual
settings will be lost and must be updated:
▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐
dated, refer to page 65.
▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again,
refer to page 128.
▷ Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos‐
sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to be
initialized. Contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 182
MOBILITY
Replacing components
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Disposing of old batteries
After they are replaced, have old bat‐
teries disposed of by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or take them to a collection
point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Have the fuses replaced by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
inside of the covers.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover
Press the snap lock.
In interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover
Push out at the recess.
Seite 183
Replacing components
MOBILITY
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located on the speedometer.
Warning triangle
Under the loading edge in the cargo area.
To remove, open the two fasteners.
First aid kit
Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
use-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐
place the items before they expire.
The first aid kit is located in the left side trim on
the cargo area floor or under the loading floor.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
A phone number for Roadside Assistance can
be displayed, refer to page 144, via the radio.
Jump-starting
Information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
Seite 184
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
two jumper cables. In the same way, you can
help jump-start another vehicle. Only use
jumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐
dles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property damage.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
Connecting jumper cables
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the cor‐
rect order during connection.◀
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐
partment to access the positive terminal.
2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminal
cover on the left and right, arrows 1, and
raise the cover, arrow 2.
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or to a starting aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
4. Attach the second clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery of the vehicle to be started.
5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
Seite 185
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐
sistance.
6. Attach the second clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Body ground:
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
Warning
There is an increased danger of accidents
when towing vehicles. There is a risk of per‐
sonal injury. Do not transport any passengers
other than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.◀
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the MINI.
The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca‐
tion, depending on the equipment:
▷ Under the right or left front seat.
▷ In the pouch of the wheel change set in the
cargo area.
CAUTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Access to the screw thread
Push out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐
ate recess in the bumper.
Front
Seite 186
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Rear
Being towed
Adhere to the following information:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Steptronic transmission
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐
ing platform.◀
Towing with a tow bar
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
ting.◀
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Towing with a tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Seite 187
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4
all-wheel drive
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Have the vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all-
wheel drive
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
risk of property damage. Only transport the ve‐
hicle on a flat-bed.◀
MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed.
Tow-starting
If possible, start the engine by jump-starting,
refer to page 184, it rather than tow-starting
the vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be tow-started.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch is depressed and then slowly release
Seite 188
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 189
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Care
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Car washes
General information
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Information
CAUTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There
is risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.◀
Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers
toward the labels applied by the manufacturer;
otherwise, damage may result.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as
leaves, from the area of the windshield when
the hood is open.
Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Do not use automatic high-pressure washers;
otherwise, water may drip into the interior in
the area of the windows.
Before driving into the car wash, check whether
the system is suitable for your MINI. Note the
following points:
▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 208.
▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐
fer to page 42.
▷ Maximum permissible tire width.
CAUTION
Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
Preparations before driving into the car wash:
▷ Unscrew the road antenna.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐
tentional wiper activation.
▷ Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro‐
tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper‐
ator about any suitable protective meas‐
ures.
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
Seite 190
MOBILITY
Care
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
▷ Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.
Steptronic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, note the fol‐
lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Hand car wash
If washing the vehicle by hand, use copious
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a
washing brush by applying gentle pressure.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the
rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐
tion or switch off the ignition.
Adhere to the local regulations regarding
washing cars by hand.
Headlights
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐
tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled,
e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse off
with copious quantities of water.
Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use an
ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside surfaces of the
windows and the mirror glasses with window
cleaner.
Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐
ing quartz.
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and soiling on
the windows cause streaking during window
wiping and lead to premature wear on the
wiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐
sor.
Vehicle care
Car care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐
cantly to vehicle value retention.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
using car care and cleaning products from
MINI.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
risk of injuries. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐
tion and protects the paintwork against the
long-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐
ces.
Environmental influences in areas with higher
air pollution or natural contaminants, such as
tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the
vehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailor
the frequency and extent of your car care to
these influences.
Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐
stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird
droppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐
work.
Seite 191
Care
MOBILITY
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Correcting paint damage
Depending on the severity of the damage, re‐
pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐
diately to prevent rust formation.
The manufacturer recommends having paint
damage corrected with a professional repair
paint job according to factory specifications us‐
ing original MINI paint materials.
Preservation
Preservation is needed when water no longer
beads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only use
paint preservation products that contain car‐
nauba or synthetic waxes.
Caring for matte finishes
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish. These are availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Leather care
The leather processed by the manufacturer is a
high quality natural product. Light graininess is
a typical feature of natural leather.
Particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores
and folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐
mature degradation of the leather surface.
Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐
larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Make especially sure that light-colored leather
is cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible to
soiling.
Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐
tion as dirt and grease will attack the protective
layer of the leather.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐
move superficial soiling.
In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains,
use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with a suitable interior cleaner.
Follow the instructions on the container.
Clean the upholstery material down to the
seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid
rubbing the material vigorously.
CAUTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Interior plastic parts
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces
▷ Lamp lenses
▷ Indicator covers
▷ Matte components
Clean with water and a solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Rubber seals
Only treat with water or a rubber care product.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use silicone
sprays or other care products containing sili‐
cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only
use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value
of 5 to 9.
Seite 192
MOBILITY
Care
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐
ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage may
result. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions.
Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐
stroy the protective coating of neighboring
components such as the brake disc.
Exterior sensors
The sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such
as for Park Distance Control, must be kept clean
and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully
functional.
Decorative trim
Clean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐
nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
safety belts. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning
the safety belts.◀
Carpets/floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber
cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐
vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Displays
To clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐
play elements, use an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
CD/DVD drives
CAUTION
The use of cleaning CDs may damage
parts of the drive. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not use cleaning CDs.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
A dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can advise you on
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
longer than three months.
Seite 193
Care
MOBILITY
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Indicator/warning lamps
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Overview
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors in display
area 1 or 2. The table contains information on
causes and how to respond. Note whether a
lamp lights up alone or in combination with an‐
other. Some lights can light up in different col‐
ors. Corresponding distinctions are made in the
text.
1 2 Cause How to respond
Turn signal
The high-beams/headlight flasher are
switched on.
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The rear fog lights are switched on.
Fasten safety belts. Fasten safety belt, refer to page 41.
External temperature warning Drive conservatively, refer to
page 61.
Seite 194
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Lights up briefly:
Approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters of fuel remain in
the tank.
Remains on:
The remaining range is no more than
30 miles/50 km, refer to page 62.
The engine refuses to start. Depress the brake or clutch to start
the engine, refer to page 51.
The ignition is switched on and driver's door
is open.
Switch off the ignition, refer to
page 50, or close the driver's door.
The lights are still switched on. Switch off the lights, refer to
page 69.
The roadside parking lamps are still on. Switch off the roadside parking
lights, refer to page 70.
A door is open.
The hood is open.
The tailgate is open.
The fuel cap is missing or loose. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor‐
rectly positioned and close it until it
clicks audibly. Do not jam the strap
between the fuel cap and the vehi‐
cle.
The windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid, refer to page 56,
as soon as possible.
Lights up in red:
Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.
Check the service requirements, re‐
fer to page 172.
Seite 195
Indicator/warning lamps
MOBILITY
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Lights up in yellow:
The engine will start the next time the Start/
Stop button is touched, possibly without the
brake or clutch being depressed.
The remote control is malfunctioning or, in
cars with Comfort Access, was not detected.
The engine cannot be started. Have
the remote control checked, if nec‐
essary.
The battery in the remote control is dis‐
charged.
Use the remote control for a longer
journey or, in cars with Comfort Ac‐
cess, replace the battery.
The belt tensioners and/or airbag system
has failed.
Have the system checked immedi‐
ately.
Fasten the safety belts anyway.
Steering assistance has failed. You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise
due caution. Markedly different
steering response. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Lights up in red:
Engine malfunction Stop the car and switch off the en‐
gine. You cannot continue your
journey. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Lights up in yellow:
Full engine power is no longer available. Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the engine
checked as soon as possible.
Indicator lamp 1 flashes:
Engine malfunction under high load. High
engine load will result in damage to the cat‐
alytic converter.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
Indicator lamp 1 lights up:
Seite 196
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Engine malfunction with adverse effect on
emissions.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Lights up in red:
The engine is overheating. Carefully bring the car to a stop,
switch off the engine and allow it to
cool down. Do not open the hood;
otherwise, there would be a risk of
injury due to scalding. Contact a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop.
Lights up in yellow:
The engine is too hot. Continue driving at more moderate
speed so that the engine can cool
down. Have the engine checked
without delay if the situation reoc‐
curs.
Lights up in red:
Battery is no longer being charged. Alterna‐
tor malfunction.
Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers. Have the power supply
system checked without delay.
Lights up in yellow:
The battery charge level is very low, the bat‐
tery is old or is not securely connected.
Charge the battery by taking a long
drive or using an external charger.
If necessary, switch off automatic
power consumers. Have the battery
checked as soon as possible.
Indication in US models
The parking brake is set.
Indication in Canadian models
The parking brake is set.
Seite 197
Indicator/warning lamps
MOBILITY
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Indication in US models
The parking brake is set while driving.
Release the parking brake.
Indication in Canadian models
The parking brake is set while driving.
Release the parking brake.
Indication in US models
Lights up in red:
The brake fluid level is too low.
Reduced braking effect, stop the
car carefully. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Indication in Canadian models
Lights up in red:
The brake fluid level is too low.
Reduced braking effect, stop the
car carefully. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Indication in US models.
Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brake
pads checked without delay.
Indication in Canadian models
Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brake
pads checked without delay.
Indication in US models
Seite 198
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Indication in Canadian models
The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Lights up in red: Have the system in question
checked immediately.
The starter has failed or The engine cannot be restarted.
Ignition malfunctioning. The engine can
only be restarted when the brake is de‐
pressed or
Lighting system failed. Low beams/tail lights
and brake lights still operational. All other
lights failed.
Depress the brake to restart the en‐
gine.
Lights up in yellow:
Brake light control failed or
The fuel supply is malfunctioning.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the system in
question checked immediately.
Drive malfunctioning. Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Transmission limp-
home program with reduced accel‐
eration is active. Have the system
checked immediately.
Flashing:
Dynamic Stability Control DSC or Dynamic
Traction Control DTC is controlling drive and
braking forces, refer to page 84.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated,
refer to page 85.
Seite 199
Indicator/warning lamps
MOBILITY
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Dynamic Stability Control DSC and Dynamic
Traction Control DTC are deactivated, refer
to page 84.
Driving stability limited during ac‐
celeration and cornering.
Driving style must be readjusted.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC and Dynamic
Traction Control DTC failed.
Driving stability limited during ac‐
celeration and cornering.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
ALL4 all-wheel drive failed. It is possible to continue driving.
Drive cautiously and defensively.
Avoid operating on poor roads and
using the full throttle and kickdown
positions of the accelerator. Have
the system checked immediately.
ALL4 all-wheel drive and DSC failed. It is possible to continue driving.
Drive cautiously and defensively.
Avoid operating on poor roads and
using the full throttle and kickdown
positions of the accelerator. Have
the system checked immediately.
Indication in US models
The driving stability control systems includ‐
ing ABS and the Tire Pressure Monitor dis‐
play have failed, refer to page 84.
Reduced braking and driving stabil‐
ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐
sively. Avoid full brake application,
operation on poor roads, and use of
full throttle and kickdown positions
of the accelerator. Have the system
checked immediately.
Indication in US models
Seite 200
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
The driving stability control systems includ‐
ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the Tire
Pressure Monitor display have failed, refer
to page 84.
Reduced braking and driving stabil‐
ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐
sively. Avoid full brake application,
operation on poor roads, and use of
full throttle and kickdown positions
of the accelerator. Have the system
checked immediately.
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems includ‐
ing ABS and the Flat Tire Monitor or the Tire
Pressure Monitor have failed, refer to
page 84.
Reduced braking and driving stabil‐
ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐
sively. Avoid full brake application,
operation on poor roads, and use of
full throttle and kickdown positions
of the accelerator. Have the system
checked immediately.
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems includ‐
ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the Flat
Tire Monitor or the Tire Pressure Monitor
have failed, refer to page 84.
Reduced braking and driving stabil‐
ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐
sively. Avoid full brake application,
operation on poor roads, and use of
full throttle and kickdown positions
of the accelerator. Have the system
checked immediately.
In vehicles with the Flat Tire Monitor
Light up in yellow and red:
A tire is deflated.
Stop carefully. Additional informa‐
tion, refer to page 77.
The Flat Tire Monitor was not initialized. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer
to page 77.
Seite 201
Indicator/warning lamps
MOBILITY
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Light up in yellow:
Flat Tire Monitor failed. Punctures are not
indicated.
Have the system checked.
In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Light up in yellow and red:
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure.
Stop carefully. Additional informa‐
tion, refer to page 79.
In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
Light up in yellow:
Tire Pressure Monitor not initialized. Check the inflation pressure and re‐
set the system, refer to page 79.
The small light flashes yellow and then stays
on, the large light lights up in yellow:
Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures are
not indicated.
Have the system checked.
A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted.
Have the system checked.
TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor
The small light flashes yellow and then stays
on, the large light lights up in yellow:
Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures are
not indicated.
Have the system checked.
A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted.
Have the system checked.
Lights up in red:
Seite 202
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
Transmission limp-home program active
with restricted range of gears, possibly with
reduced acceleration.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the system
checked immediately.
Gears can be engaged without depressing
the brake.
Always depress the brake to en‐
gage a gear.
Automatic selector lever locked: Manually unlock the selector lever
lock, refer to page 59.
Lights up in yellow: Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Automatic selector lever locked:
The selector lever is locked in position P
with the engine running or the ignition
switched on and the brake depressed or
Manually unlock the selector lever
lock, refer to page 59.
The brake signal is malfunctioning: a gear
can be engaged without depressing the
brake.
To engage a gear while the vehicle
is at a standstill, always depress the
brake. Before leaving the vehicle,
move the selector lever to position
P and switch off the engine.
Lights up in red:
The transmission is overheating. Bring the car to a stop and move
the selector lever to position P. Al‐
low the transmission to cool down.
Further driving at a moderate pace
is possible. Have the system
checked if the situation reoccurs.
Lights up in yellow:
The transmission is too hot. Avoid high engine loads. Further
driving at a moderate pace is possi‐
ble.
Selector lever position P not engaged. The
vehicle is not secured against rolling.
Selector lever position P not engaged. The
ignition cannot be switched off.
Engage selector lever position P
when you wish to switch off the ig‐
nition, refer to page 50.
Seite 203
Indicator/warning lamps
MOBILITY
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
1 2 Cause How to respond
The cruise control system has failed. Have the system checked.
The Park Distance Control has failed. Have the system checked.
A bulb of the exterior lighting system has
failed.
Have the exterior lighting checked
as soon as possible.
A low-beam headlight or front fog light has
failed.
Have the lights checked as soon as
possible.
A high-beam headlight has failed. Have the high-beam headlights
checked.
A rear fog light has failed. Have the rear fog lights checked.
The headlight beam throw adjustment has
failed.
Have the headlight beam throw ad‐
justment system checked.
The Adaptive Light Control has failed.
The engine oil pressure is too low.
Stop immediately and switch off
the engine. You cannot continue
your journey. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Lights up in red:
The service appointment is overdue. Arrange a service appointment.
Check the service requirements, re‐
fer to page 66.
Lights up in yellow:
Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.
Check the service requirements, re‐
fer to page 66.
Seite 204
MOBILITY
Indicator/warning lamps
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Technical data
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
When using the features and systems described
here, adhere to local regulations.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents or on labels
on the vehicle, or can be obtained from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
MINI Countryman
MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789
Height inches/mm 61.7/1,566 61.7/1,566 61.4/1,560
Length
With aerodynamic bumper
inches/mm
inches/mm
161.7/4,107
-
162.2/4,119
163.2/4,144
163.1/4,143
Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6
Seite 208
REFERENCE
Technical data
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
MINI Paceman
MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786
Height inches/mm 60.4/1,533 60.4/1,533 60.1/1,527
Length
With aerodynamic bumper
inches/mm
inches/mm
162.2/4,119
-
162.4/4,124
162.8/4,134
162.8/4,134
Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
MINI Countryman
Cooper Cooper S
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 3,990/1,810
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,925/1,780 4,035/1,830
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,060/934 2,145/973
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964 2,200/998
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,920/871 1,920/871
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170
Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,100/1,860 4,155/1,885
Seite 209
Technical data
REFERENCE
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,210/1,002 2,210/1,002
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,260/1,025 2,260/1,025
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914 2,070/939
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170
MINI Paceman
Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper
Works
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882
Steptronic transmis‐
sion
lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998
Steptronic transmis‐
sion
lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016
Approved rear axle
load
lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934
Approved roof load ca‐
pacity
lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liter
13.9-40.7/
330–1,080
13.9-40.7/
330–1,080
13.9-40.7/
330–1,080
13.9-40.7/
330–1,080
Seite 210
REFERENCE
Technical data
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 84
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 67
Activated charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 95
Adaptive Light Control 71
Additives, engine oil 169
Airbags 74
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 77
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode, air condi‐
tioner 92
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode, automatic
climate control 94
Air conditioning 91
Air conditioning mode, air
conditioner 91
Air conditioning mode, auto‐
matic climate control 93
Air distribution, air condi‐
tioner, manual 92
Air distribution, automatic 94
Air distribution, automatic cli‐
mate control, manual 94
Air distribution, individual 92
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 95
Air flow rate for air condi‐
tioner 91
Air flow rate with automatic
climate control 94
Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐
tion pressure 154
Air supply, air conditioner 91
Air supply, automatic climate
control 93
Alarm system 30
Alarm system, avoiding unin‐
tentional alarms 32
Alarm system, ending an
alarm 31
Alarm system, interior motion
sensor 32
Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐
sor 31
ALL4 all-wheel system 86
All-wheel drive, refer to
ALL4 86
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 97
Ambient lighting 73
Antifreeze, washer fluid 56
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 84
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control
DSC 84
Anti-theft protection 21
Approved engine oils 169
Ashtray 100
Assistance, roadside 184
Assistance when driving off,
refer to Hill drive-off assis‐
tant 86
Assistance with starting en‐
gine, refer to Jump-start‐
ing 184
Automatic air distribution 94
Automatic air flow 94
Automatic car wash 190
Automatic climate control 93
Automatic climate control, au‐
tomatic air distribution 94
Automatic, cruise control 88
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 69
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 57
AUTO program with auto‐
matic climate control 94
AUX-IN port 132
Average fuel consumption 63
Average fuel consumption,
setting the unit 64
Average speed 63
Average speed, refer to Com‐
puter 62
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 37
Backrests, refer to Seats 36
Backup lights, bulb replace‐
ment 179
Battery disposal 30
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐
tery 182
Battery, remote control 20
Battery replacement, remote
control 30
Belts, refer to Safety belts 38
Belt tensioners, refer to Safety
belts 38
Bi-xenon headlights 175
Brake assistant 84
Brake discs, breaking in 112
Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐
quirements 66
Brake force distribution, elec‐
tronic 84
Brake pads, breaking in 112
Brake, refer to Parking
brake 52
Seite 212
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Brakes, MINI maintenance
system 172
Brakes, service require‐
ments 66
Brake system, MINI mainte‐
nance system 172
Braking, notes 113
Braking, parking brake 52
Breakdown assistance, Road‐
side Assistance 184
Breaking in 112
Buckle tongues height adjust‐
ment 39
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 50
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 182
Car care products 191
Care, displays 193
Care, vehicle 191
Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐
cess 29
Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐
gate 27
Cargo area, enlarging, cargo
cover 102
Cargo area, flat loading
floor 104
Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 72
Cargo area, multi-function
hook 105
Cargo area, opening from the
outside 27
Cargo area, partition net 104
Car horn, refer to Horn 12
Carpet, care 193
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 138
Car wash 190
CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐
trol 84
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 172
CD/DVD drives, care 193
Center armrest 107
Center console, refer to
Around the center con‐
sole 15
Center rail 107
Center rail, refer to Storage
compartments 107
Central locking, Comfort Ac‐
cess 28
Central locking from the in‐
side 25
Central locking system, con‐
cept 21
Central locking system, from
the outside 21
Changes, technical, refer to
Own Safety 6
Changing wheels/tires 160
Check Control 67
Children, transporting 45
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 47
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tems 45
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 46
Child seat, mounting 46
Child seats, refer to Transport‐
ing children safely 45
Chrome parts, care 192
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode, air con‐
ditioner 92
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode, auto‐
matic climate control 94
Cleaning, displays 193
Cleaning, refer to Care 190
Climate 91
Climate mode, ventilation 95
Clock 61
Clock, 12h/24h mode 64
Closing from the inside 25
Closing from the outside 22
Clutch, breaking in 112
Cockpit 12
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 51
Combination instrument, refer
to Displays 14
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signal/high-beams/
headlight flasher 53
Combination switch, refer to
Washer/wiper system 54
Comfort Access 28
Comfort Access, in the car
wash 29
Comfort Access, replacing the
battery 30
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 15
Compartment for remote con‐
trol, refer to Ignition lock 50
Compass, digital 98
Computer 62
Computer, displaying informa‐
tion 62
Condition Based Service
CBS 172
Confirmation signals for vehi‐
cle locking/unlocking 23
Consumption, refer to Aver‐
age fuel consumption 63
Control Display, care 193
Controls and displays 12
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 84
Convenient operation, win‐
dow 23
Coolant temperature 62
Cooling function, switching on
and off 95
Cooling, maximum 94
Cornering Brake Control,
CBC 84
Corrosion on brake discs 114
Seite 213
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 145
Cruise control 88
Cupholders 100
Current fuel consumption 63
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 71
D
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 72
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Dashboard, refer to Dis‐
plays 14
Date, display format 64
Date, setting 65
Daytime running lights 70
Decorative trim, care 193
Defogging windows 92
Defroster, rear window, auto‐
matic climate control 95
Defroster, rear window, with
air conditioner 92
Defrosting windows 92
Defrost setting, refer to De‐
frosting windows 92
Digital compass 98
Dip stick, engine oil 168
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 53
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 72
Displays 14
Displays and controls 12
Displays, care 193
Displays, cleaning 193
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 14
Disposal, remote control bat‐
tery 30
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 90
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 20
Door lock 25
Door lock, confirmation sig‐
nals 23
Doors, manual operation 25
Doors, unlocking and locking,
confirmation signals 23
Doors, unlocking and locking
from the inside 25
Doors, unlocking and locking,
from the outside 22
DOT Quality Grades 158
Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill
drive-off assistant 86
Driving notes, breaking
in 112
Driving off on hills, refer to Hill
drive-off assistant 86
Driving on poor roads 114
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 84
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 112
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
tion 95
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 84
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 85
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 84
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 85
E
Electrical malfunction, door
lock 25
Electrical malfunction, fuel
filler flap 150
Electronic brake-force distri‐
bution 84
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control DSC 84
Emergency operation, fuel
filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 150
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation 25
Emergency operation, Step‐
tronic transmission, refer to
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 59
Energy, saving, refer to Saving
fuel 120
Engine, breaking in 112
Engine compartment 166
Engine oil, adding 168
Engine oil, additives, refer to
Approved engine oils 169
Engine oil, alternative oil
types 169
Engine oil change intervals,
refer to Service require‐
ments 66
Engine oil, dip stick 168
Engine oil, filling capacity 211
Engine oil, MINI maintenance
system 172
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 169
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 169
Engine, overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 62
Engine start, assistance 184
Engine, starting 51
Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐
cess 28
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
button 50
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
button 50
Engine, switching off 52
Equipment, interior 96
Seite 214
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 84
Exchanging wheels/tires 160
Exterior mirrors 42
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 42
Exterior mirrors, folding in and
out 43
Exterior sensors, care 193
External temperature dis‐
play 61
External temperature display,
changing the unit 64
External temperature warn‐
ing 61
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 67
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 32
Fan, refer to Air flow rate for
air conditioner 91
Fan, refer to Air flow rate with
automatic climate con‐
trol 94
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 38
Fault messages, refer to Check
Control 67
Filling capacities 211
Filter, refer to Activated-char‐
coal filter 93
Filter, refer to Microfilter 93
Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter with au‐
tomatic climate control 95
First aid kit 184
First aid, refer to First aid
kit 184
Flashing when locking/unlock‐
ing 23
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 78
Flat tire, indicator/warning
lamp 78
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 77
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire
message 78
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐
ing the system 78
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
chains 77
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system
limits 77
Flat tire, run-flat tire 79
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 79
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 79
Flat tire, wheel change 181
Floor mats, care 193
Fog lights 72
Foot brake 113
Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐
rior lights 72
Four-wheel drive, refer to
ALL4 86
Front airbags 74
Front fog light, bulb replace‐
ment 177
Front fog lights 72
Front lights, bulb replace‐
ment 176
Front passenger airbags, de‐
activating 75
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 77
Fuel 152
Fuel, additives 152
Fuel, average consump‐
tion 63
Fuel cap, closing 150
Fuel consumption display,
average fuel consump‐
tion 63
Fuel filler flap, closing 150
Fuel filler flap, opening 150
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
case of an electrical malfunc‐
tion 150
Fuel gauge 62
Fuel, refer to Average fuel
consumption 63
Fuel, saving 120
Fuel tank capacity, refer to
Filling capacities 211
Fuel tank contents, refer to
Filling capacities 211
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
pacities 211
Fuse 183
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 96
Gasoline 152
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 62
Gear change, manual trans‐
mission 57
Gear change, Steptronic trans‐
mission 58
Gear display, Steptronic trans‐
mission 57
Glare protection 98
Glass sunroof, electrical 32
Glass sunroof, electrical, open‐
ing/closing 33
Glass sunroof, electrical, rais‐
ing 32
Glass sunroof, electric, con‐
venient operation 23
Glass sunroof, electric, remote
control 23
H
Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
placement 176
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 52
Hand car wash, care 191
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 97
Hands-free system 15
Seite 215
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Hazard warning system 15
Head airbags 74
Headlamp control, refer to
Parking lamps/low
beams 69
Headlamps, care 191
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 69
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 71
Headlight flasher 53
Headlights 69
Headlights, cleaning, washer
fluid 57
Head restraints 41
Head restraints, adjusting the
height 41
Head restraints, removing 42
Heatable rear window, air
conditioner 92
Heatable windshield 95
Heating, rear window with au‐
tomatic climate control 95
Heating, seats 38
Heating, windshield 95
Height adjustment, seats 36
High-beams 70
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 176
Hill drive-off assistant 86
Hills 114
Holder for remote control, re‐
fer to Ignition lock 50
Homepage 6
Hood 167
Hood, closing 167
Hood, opening 167
Hood, unlocking 167
Horn 12
Hydraulic brake assistant 84
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 61
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 61
Identification marks, run-flat
tires 162
Identification marks, tires 158
Ignition 50
Ignition key position 1, refer
to Radio ready state 50
Ignition key position 2, refer
to Ignition on 50
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 20
Ignition lock 50
Ignition, switched off 51
Ignition, switched on 50
Indicator and warning lamps,
overview 194
Indicator and warning lamps,
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 80
Indicator and warning
lights 15
Individual air distribution 92
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 77
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 79
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 154
Initializing, compass, refer to
Calibrating 99
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 78
Initializing, glass sunroof,
electrical 33
Instrument cluster, refer to
Displays 14
Instrument lighting 72
Instruments, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Integrated key 20
Integrated universal remote
control 96
Interior equipment 96
Interior lights 72
Interior lights, remote con‐
trol 24
Interior mirror 43
Interior motion sensor 32
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 98
Interior temperature, setting,
air conditioner 91
Interior temperature, setting,
automatic climate con‐
trol 93
Internet page 6
J
Jump-starting 184
K
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 28
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 28
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 21
Key, refer to Remote control
with integrated key 20
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 58
Knee airbag 74
Knocking control 152
L
Lamp and bulb replacement,
bulb replacement 175
Lamp, replacing, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 175
Lamps 69
Lamps, automatic headlight
control 69
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 38
Seite 216
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 47
Leather care 192
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 175
License plate light, bulb re‐
placement 179
Light-alloy wheels, care 192
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 175
Lighter, socket 100
Lighting, instruments 72
Lighting, light and bulb re‐
placement 175
Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Lamps 69
Lights, parking lamps/low
beams 69
Light switch 69
Lock buttons on doors, refer
to Locking 26
Locking from the inside 26
Locking, from the outside 23
Locking, setting the confirma‐
tion signal 23
Locking the vehicle from the
inside 25
Locking the vehicle from the
outside 22
Locking without remote con‐
trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 28
Longlife oils, alternative oil
types 169
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐
proved engine oils 169
Low beams 69
Low beams, automatic 69
Low beams, bulb replace‐
ment 176
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 37
Lumbar support 37
M
Main inspection, refer to Serv‐
ice requirements 66
Maintenance, refer to Service
booklet
Maintenance, refer to Service
requirements 66
Maintenance require‐
ments 172
Maintenance system
MINI 172
Makeup mirror 98
Malfunction, door lock 25
Malfunction, fuel filler
flap 150
Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐
mission 59
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 67
Manual air distribution, air
conditioner 92
Manual air distribution, auto‐
matic climate control 94
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 58
Manual operation, door
lock 25
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 150
Manual operation, selector
lever lock, Steptronic trans‐
mission 59
Marking on approved
tires 161
Maximum cooling 94
Maximum speed, winter
tires 161
Microfilter 93
Microfilter, with automatic cli‐
mate control 95
MINI Homepage 6
MINI Internet page 6
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 172
MINI Mobility System 162
Minimum tread, tires 160
Mirrors 42
Mirrors, folding in and out 43
Mirrors, interior mirror 43
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 113
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 138
Mobility System 162
Modifications, technical, refer
to Own Safety 6
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 46
N
Neck restraints, refer to Head
restraints 41
New wheels and tires 160
Notes 6
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
tion 95
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 173
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 173
Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 152
Octane rating, refer to Recom‐
mended fuel grade 152
Odometer 61
Oil additives 169
Oil level 168
Oil types, alternative 169
Oil types, approved 169
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 173
Opening and closing, Comfort
Access 28
Opening and closing from the
inside 25
Seite 217
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Opening and closing from the
outside 22
Opening and closing, using
the door lock 25
Opening and closing, via the
remote control 22
Opening and unlocking from
the inside 26
Outside air mode, automatic
climate control 94
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode, air condi‐
tioner 92
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode, automatic
climate control 94
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 62
Own safety 6
P
Park Distance Control PDC 90
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 90
Parking assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 90
Parking brake 52
Parking light, bulb replace‐
ment 177
Parking lights 69
Parking lights/low beams 69
PDC Park Distance Control 90
Personal Profile 21
Pinch protection, windows 34
Pivoting sun visor 98
Plastic, care 192
Pollen, refer to Microfilter 93
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 93
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 95
Poor road operation 114
Power windows 33
Power windows, refer to Win‐
dows 33
Prescribed engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 169
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 79
Pressure, tires 154
Pressure warning, tires 77
Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
mum tread depth 160
Profile, tires 159
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system,
windows 34
R
Radio MINI Boost CD 124
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 20
Radio ready state 50
Radio ready state, switched
off 51
Radio ready state, switched
on 50
Radio setting, refer to Radio
ready state 50
Rain sensor 55
Range 63
Rear 37
Rear fog light, bulb replace‐
ment 179
Rear lights, refer to Tail
lights 179
Rear seat backrests, foldable,
MINI Countryman 102
Rear seat backrests, foldable,
MINI Paceman 103
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
rors 42
Rear window defroster with
air conditioner 92
Rear window defroster with
automatic climate con‐
trol 95
Rear window, washing 56
Rear window wiper 56
Recirculated air mode, air
conditioner 92
Recirculated air mode, auto‐
matic climate control 94
Recommended fuel
grade 152
Recommended tire
brands 161
Releasing, refer to Unlock‐
ing 29
Remaining range for service,
refer to Service require‐
ments 66
Remaining range, refer to
Range 63
Remote control 20
Remote control, battery re‐
placement 30
Remote control, Comfort Ac‐
cess 28
Remote control, Comfort Ac‐
cess, malfunctions 29
Remote control, garage door
opener 96
Remote control, radio interfer‐
ence 24
Remote control, removing
from the ignition lock 50
Remote control, service
data 172
Remote control, universal 96
Replacement remote con‐
trol 20
Replacing wheels/tires 160
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 9
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 62
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
fer to Washer fluid reser‐
voir 57
Seite 218
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Restraining systems, refer to
Safety belts 38
Restraint systems for chil‐
dren 45
Retreaded tires 161
Reverse gear, manual trans‐
mission 57
Roadside Assistance 184
Roadside parking light, bulb
replacement 177
Roadside parking lights 70
RON recommended fuel
grade 152
RON, refer to Fuel quality 152
Rubber seals, care 192
Run-flat tires 162
Run-flat tires, flat tire 78
Run-flat tires, tire inflation
pressure 154
S
Safe braking 113
Safety belts, care 193
Safety belts, damage 41
Safety belts, indicator/warning
light 41
Safety belts, rear center safety
belt 40
Safety belts, reminder 41
Safety systems, airbags 74
Safety systems, safety
belts 38
Saving fuel 120
Seat adjustment 37
Seat adjustment, manual 36
Seat belts 38
Seat heating 38
Seats 36
Seats, adjusting 36
Seats, heating 38
Seats, sitting safely 36
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 59
Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐
lector level positions, chang‐
ing, shiftlock 58
Selector lever positions, Step‐
tronic transmission 58
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 58
Service and warranty 7
Service data in the remote
control 172
Service interval display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 172
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 66
Service requirements 66
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Service 172
Settings and information 63
Settings, clock 64
Settings, configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 21
Shifting, manual transmis‐
sion 57
Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 58
Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐
mission 58
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 59
Side airbags 74
Side windows, refer to Win‐
dows 33
Sitting safely 36
Sliding/tilting sunroof, refer to
Glass sunroof, electrical 32
Slot for remote control 50
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 145
Snow chains 165
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 173
Special equipment, series
equipment 6
Speed, average 63
Speedometer 14
Speed, with winter tires 161
Sport button 86
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 58
Stability control systems 84
Start/Stop button 50
Start/Stop button, starting the
engine 51
Start/Stop button, switching
off the engine 52
Starting the engine 51
Start problems, refer to Jump-
starting 184
Steering wheel 44
Steering wheel, adjusting 44
Steering wheel lock 50
Steering wheel, shift pad‐
dles 59
Steptronic transmission 57
Steptronic transmission, kick‐
down 58
Steptronic transmission, over‐
riding the selector lever
lock 59
Stopping, engine 52
Storage, tires 162
Storing the vehicle 193
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 154
Summer tires, tread 159
Sun visor 98
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Switching off, engine 52
Switching off, vehicle 52
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 62
Tailgate 27
Tailgate, Comfort Access 29
Tailgate, opening/closing 27
Tailgate, opening from the
outside 27
Tail lights 179
Seite 219
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 62
Technical changes, refer to
Own Safety 6
Telephone 138
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 92
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 94
Temperature, coolant, refer to
Coolant temperature 62
Temperature display, external
temperature 61
Temperature display, external
temperature warning 61
Temperature display, setting
the units 64
Temperature warning 61
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 30
Tilt alarm sensor 31
Time, setting the time 65
Tire age 160
Tire, flat tire 78
Tire identification marks 158
Tire inflation pressure 154
Tire inflation pressure, pres‐
sure loss, FTM 78
Tire pressure loss, RDC 80
Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐
fer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 79
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 77
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 79
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
system limits 82
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
system reset 80
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,
warning lamp 80
Tire Quality Grading 158
Tires, breaking in 112
Tires, changing 160
Tires, condition 159
Tires, damage 160
Tire size 158
Tires, minimum tread 160
Tires, retreaded tires 161
Tires, storage 162
Tire tread 159
Towing another vehicle 186
Towing, being towed 186
Tow-starting 186
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 79
Traction control 85
Transmission lock, refer to
Changing the selector lever
positions 58
Transmission, overriding the
selector lever lock with Step‐
tronic transmission 59
Transmission, refer to Manual
transmission 57
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 57
Transporting children
safely 45
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 61
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 53
Trip odometer 61
Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 27
Trunk, refer to Cargo area 27
Turning lights, refer to Adap‐
tive Light Control 71
Turn signal, bulb replace‐
ment 177
Turn signal indicator lamp 14
Turn signals 53
Turn signals, triple turn signal
activation 53
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQG 158
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
ing 32
Units, average fuel consump‐
tion 64
Units, temperature 64
Universal remote control 96
Unlocking from the inside 26
Unlocking, from the out‐
side 22
Unlocking, tailgate 29
Unlocking, without remote
control, refer to Comfort Ac‐
cess 28
Upholstery care 192
Upholstery material care 192
USB audio interface 133
V
Vanity mirror 98
Vehicle battery 182
Vehicle, breaking in 112
Vehicle care 191
Vehicle care, refer to
Care 190
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle paintwork, care 191
Vehicle storage 193
Vehicle, switching off 52
Vehicle wash 190
Ventilation, air condition‐
ing 95
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 15
Warning and indicator lamps,
overview 194
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 67
Warning triangle 184
Washer/wiper system 54
Washer/wiper system, rain
sensor 55
Washer/wiper system, washer
fluid 56
Washer fluid 56
Seite 220
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
Washer fluid reservoir 57
Washing, vehicle 190
Welcome lights 71
Wheel change 181
Wheels and tires 154
Wheels, changing 160
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 77
Window, convenient opera‐
tion 23
Windows 33
Windows, care 191
Windows, closing 33
Windows, defrosting and de‐
fogging 92
Windows, opening 33
Windows, pinch protection 34
Windshield defroster 95
Windshield, defrosting and
defogging 92
Windshield, defrosting, refer
to Defrosting windows 92
Windshield wash 54
Windshield washer fluid 56
Windshield wash, rear win‐
dow 56
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 57
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 57
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 174
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 54
Winter storage, care 193
Winter tires 161
Winter tires, tread 159
Wiper blades, care 191
Wiper blades, changing 174
Wiper fluid 56
Y
Your individual vehicle, set‐
tings, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 21
Seite 221
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
01 40 2 964 433 ue
*BL2964433007*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 433 - VI/15
